JP2024010256A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine for holding a lottery of a disadvantageous RB1 and an advantageous RB2 and changing a degree of impartation of profit according to an internally won RB that reduces putout balls in a big bonus game.SOLUTION: A BB game includes: a BB general game; an RB game to be started when an RB winning combination is won during the game and a pattern is displayed and operated; and an RB internal game resulting in an internally won state without any operation of a won RB winning combination. The RB winning combination includes two kinds of RB1's and a more advantageous RB2, and one of them is won with a high probability in a BB general game. When a compound small winning combination is won in an RB1 internal state, a main control portion 100 draws a one small winning combination or a bell small winning combination and allows it to be won, but kicks a rare small winning combination and does not allow it to be won. In the meantime, when a compound small winning combination is won in an RB2 internal game, a rare small winning combination is drawn and is allowed to be won. The main control part 100 performs a process advantageous to an AT bonus.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 107

Description

The present invention relates to pachislot machines that use medals and coins as game media, pachilot machines that use pachinko balls as game media, and substitute coins called electronic data and tokens (playing value, The present invention relates to gaming machines such as slot machines (player-type gaming machines), etc., in which games are played using game values (or gaming values).

Further, the present invention provides a program (for example, game software) in which control steps or control procedures for realizing the gaming method are recorded on an information storage medium such as a semiconductor memory, a memory stick, an HD (hard disk), or a Blu-ray disc. ) itself is also related.

2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, games using reel-type gaming machines called pachislot machines have become popular in conventional pachinko halls and halls dedicated to pachislot. There is also a reel-type game machine called Pachilot (or Parrot) that uses pachinko balls used in a pachinko machine (pinball-type game machine) as a game medium to play the above-described reel-type game. In video game machines such as amusement facilities, as well as PCs and game machines in general households that are connected via the Internet, a substitute coin called a token (i.e., "gaming medium") is used to play a reel-type game. A simulation game is being played. In the near future, it is also planned that reel-type gaming machines will be able to record equivalent electronic data, tokens, and other gaming values on IC cards and use them for gaming, without using medals or coins. (so-called medalless gaming machines).

For example, in the normal game of the above-mentioned reel-type gaming machine, when the player operates the start lever after inserting a predetermined number of gaming medals (gaming media or tokens), a bonus, multiple small winnings, or a replay can be awarded at that timing. An internal lottery (also referred to as "internal lottery") for winning combinations (replays) is carried out, and multiple reel drums (in most cases, three or four reel drums) are rotated from top to bottom. Starting a variable display game in which a plurality of symbols displayed (drawn) on the body (normally, the plurality of symbols are drawn on a reel tape and pasted on each drum) is varied; When the player operates the stop button corresponding to each drum and the internally won small winning symbols such as bell, watermelon, and cherry are stopped and displayed on the active line in a predetermined combination, the prize is won, and 1 piece ~ Approximately 15 game medals are paid out, but when the replay symbol is displayed on the active line and the replay (replay) is activated, you can pay out the game medals without inserting the game medals (or inserting the number of game medals inserted in the previous game as is). ), the player enters a replay state where the next normal game can be played.

In particular, as a result of the internal lottery of the normal game, a bonus role (type 1 or type 2 special role continuous operation device) is internally won, and a specific symbol (for example, red 7 symbol or blue 7 symbol) is won by stopping the reel drum. Big Bonus Game Mode (BB Game Mode: Role-playing Series) is the most advantageous game mode for the player when the game is stopped and displayed on the valid line (the valid line may be a straight line or an irregular line). Actuating device), you can earn a large amount of game medals at once. Also, if a regular bonus (a kind of special accessory) is won and the bar symbol as a specific symbol is aligned on the active line, a regular bonus game (RB game) will be executed, and although it is far from a BB game, It is possible to obtain a corresponding amount of game medals, and in any case, the player's greatest interest in playing these bonus games is to complete these bonus games. In addition, if a bonus game is won or released as a result of executing the internal lottery, a bonus flag is set and stored in a data storage area such as RAM or RWM, and a predetermined specific symbol (7 symbols or bar) is displayed. The flag is carried over to subsequent variable display games until all the symbols (symbols) are aligned.

By the way, conventional reel-type gaming machines (No. 4 machines) have a relatively high gambling quality, and in order to suppress this, the Act on Regulation of Entertainment Businesses, etc. and Business Properization, etc. (Last revised: May 2003) Act No. 55) was enacted on the 30th, and applied to the latest reel-type gaming machines known as No. 5 machines.

For example, for No. 5 or No. 6 drum-type gaming machines, the payout rate (short-term, medium-term, long-term) is very precisely regulated by the rules, and in the big bonus game (BB game), the winning game medals, etc. The game ends when the number of coins exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 360 or 480 coins), and in the regular bonus game, although it is not as high as the BB game, it ends when around 100 or more coins are obtained. It has become. In other words, the revised rules have lowered the upper limit on the number of medals that can be paid out in one bonus game and the rate at which medals can be increased per game.

In addition, the bonus stock function that allows continuous bonuses to be released (continuously), which is the biggest feature of conventional reel-type gaming machines (No. 4 machine), was also prohibited under the same regulations, and as a result The ingenuity and performance that had been given to the machines themselves have been lost, and as a result, the gameplay and gambling experience has been drastically reduced, and players (slotters) who were once good customers are losing their customers.

However, even in such a strict regulatory situation, regulations have been relaxed to some extent, and as a result of new innovations, the third bonus, the ART function (assist replay time function) or A slot machine equipped with an AT function (assist time function) has been developed. This ART function, etc., is used to control the symbol stop operation procedure (stop switch operation order, bonus This function assists button operations by announcing the operation timing (to aim at the color of the symbol) on the LCD display or by voice, and at present, ART machines are the mainstream of No. 5 or No. 6 slot machines.

In particular, recently, rather than increasing the number of winnings with big bonuses and regular bonuses using the main control mentioned above, sub-controls have been used to increase the number of winnings at the desired timing (timing when winning the AT lottery with rare small winnings, the number of games played is the ceiling number of games, etc.) By activating ART (pseudo bonus, 3rd bonus) when the player reaches 1) and notifying the push order, it is possible to win the push order minor combination with a high probability and create a wave of balls. Going even further, by internally winning the 2nd type big bonus (2nd type BB), which does not increase or decrease medals even if you win, you can maintain a high probability replay state, always play the game in this state, and start using only the ART function. Many machines that control balls have also become hits, and drum-type gaming machines with a variety of game features are appearing one after another.

Going further, in the type bonus (RB), there are three types of small roles in which the number of coins paid out is greater than the number of coins inserted (for example, nine coins are paid out in a bell minor role). This bonus has appeared, which has the property that by stacking the winning areas, the number of balls that come out will decrease as a result.

This reduced bonus (RB) does not provide any benefit to the player, and at first glance it may seem meaningless, but the advantage is that the reduced number of balls due to this bonus can be intensively added to the assist bonus. occurs. In other words, it is possible to effectively create a wave of balls, which has the effect of restoring the reduced gambling quality.

JP2011-160844 JP2011-125532 JP2011-15719 JP2016-202586 JP2018-117700

Reel-type game machine Fist of the North Star -Legend of the savior at the end of the century- (Sammy Co., Ltd.) Reel-type gaming machine Midoridon VIVA! Passionate South America Edition (Eleco)

By the way, as an original technology of ART newly developed by the applicant (Patent No. 5433889), a 6-choice press order minor win is won, and if both the first and second operation of the stop button are correct, a predetermined symbol ( For example, there is a system in which a bell symbol) is placed in a straight line on an active line, while a stop control is performed to prevent a target small combination from being won due to an incorrect answer. Then, when an ART (assist function and high probability game state) is won, the correct operating procedure is notified to the player, thereby making a big difference in the number of medals acquired. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large amount of medals by creating a high-probability gaming state, eliminating mistakes, and notifying an advantageous push order by AT, thereby creating a wave of balls.

However, with the conventional decreasing bonus (RB), when the RB wins, the number of balls that come out always decreases, so there is no benefit for the player during the RB, and as a result, the player loses motivation. There was a problem.

In addition, in the ART bonus, since the conventional outlier area is changed to replay winning, there is a high probability of winning in replay where the medals do not increase during the game, and the player is annoyed that he wastes that much time. .

Firstly, in a big bonus game, the present invention increases interest by drawing a lottery for unfavorable RB1 and advantageous RB2 and changing the degree of profit granted to the player according to the internally won RB (decreasing bonus). Our goal is to provide gaming machines, etc. that can

Another purpose is to provide a gaming machine or the like that allows a player to easily recognize that the freeze effect is being played.

Another object of the present invention is to provide a game machine or the like in which a player does not forget to return the inserted medals when he or she settles the credits, and does not miss winnings in replay winning combinations (particularly, bell replay winning combinations). An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine, etc., in which a player does not feel uncomfortable with the winning display mode and operation method of small winning combinations and replay winning combinations in normal games and AT games. The present invention is equipped with conventional bonus roles such as BB and RB, as well as the third bonus ART function or AT function, and can further increase the net number of additional coins per game, increasing the number of assist function activations. The purpose is to provide gaming machines etc. that can be increased at once. The present invention provides a gaming machine, etc. that can avoid fraudulent winnings of push order winning combinations (pressing order minor winning combinations or pushing order replaying winning combinations) even if a sub-control unit that controls the display of navigation images is tampered with. It's about doing.

In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the gaming machine of the present invention according to claim 1 uses a plurality of spinning drums in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer circumferential surface, and data for lottery in a game to determine the winning combination. A winning combination lottery means for performing a lottery, rotates a plurality of playing drums in a game, accepts operation of a stop switch provided corresponding to each playing drum, stops the corresponding playing drums individually, and selects the winning combination. It is equipped with a control means for displaying a symbol according to a lottery result, and an advantageous processing means for performing advantageous processing in the game, and among the winnings determined by the lottery by the winning winning lottery means, at least a big bonus winning combination is provided. , a regular bonus role, a small role, and a replay role, and the game includes a normal game in which at least the replay role is won with a predetermined probability, and a big bonus role in the normal game that is won and activated. There is a big bonus game in which the transition is made by , and an assist game in which the operating procedure of the stop switch is announced. There is a composite small win that is won at the same time, and the big bonus game includes a big bonus general game, a regular bonus game that is transferred by winning and operating a regular bonus role in the big bonus general game, and the won regular bonus game. There was a regular bonus internal game in which the bonus role did not activate and became an internal winning state.
The regular bonus roles include a first regular bonus role and a second regular bonus role that is more advantageous than the first regular bonus role, and in the regular bonus internal game, the first regular bonus role is internally won. There is a first regular bonus internal medium game in which the second regular bonus combination has become an internal winning state, and a second regular bonus internal medium game in which the second regular bonus combination has become an internal winning state, and in the first regular bonus internal medium game, the control The means is configured to stop and control the plurality of spinning drums so as to draw a normal small winning symbol onto the active line by operating the stop switch when the compound small winning combination is won, while controlling the second regular bonus internal medium game. In the above, when the composite minor winning combination is won, the control means controls the plurality of spinning drums to stop so as to draw a rare minor winning symbol onto the activated line by operating the stop switch, When the player wins, the advantageous processing means performs processing that is more advantageous for the assist game in the second regular bonus internal medium game than in the first regular bonus internal medium game.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, firstly, the same lottery data is used to draw the winning combination, but in the normal regular bonus internal medium game during the normal game and the BB game, the composite small winning combination is When winning, a common small winning combination is won, but when a composite small winning combination is won in an advantageous regular bonus internal medium game, symbols are drawn so that a rare small winning combination is won. As a result, the probability of winning the assist game based on winning the rare small winning combination is greatly improved, so it is possible to differentiate the advantage. Furthermore, it becomes possible to increase the number of assist function activations (additional number) at once.

FIG. 2 is a schematic front view of the drum-type gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the drum-type gaming machine. It is a perspective view of a design panel. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the drum-type gaming machine. It is a block diagram of the control circuit system of the reel-type gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a control circuit system that controls the drum section. FIG. 3 is a configuration block diagram of a drum section. This is a drum pattern layout table. FIG. 3 is a configuration block diagram of a drum section. FIG. 3 is a configuration block diagram of a drum section. 5 is a timing chart showing the relationship between each signal. It is a schematic diagram of a left drum. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship with a left drum, a window part, and pattern position data. It is a combination display determination diagram of symbols. FIG. 2 is a configuration block diagram of a display production device. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the storage state of a performance pattern data table. It is a schematic diagram of a production screen. It is a schematic diagram of a production screen. It is a schematic diagram of a production screen. It is a conceptual diagram of a general lottery table. This is a payout table showing the relationship between symbol combinations and the number of acquired medals. It is a flowchart showing the main operation processing procedure of the reel type gaming machine. This is a drum pattern layout table. It is a combination display determination diagram of symbols. This is the payout table when the accessory is not activated (during normal play, the specified number of coins is 3). It is a conceptual diagram showing a game state transition diagram and lottery probabilities of various winning combinations. It is a conceptual diagram showing a simultaneous winning state of winning combinations. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a flowchart showing a symbol stop processing subroutine. It is a schematic diagram of the performance screen displayed by the display performance device. It is a schematic diagram of the performance screen displayed by the display performance device. It is a schematic diagram of the performance screen displayed by the display performance device. It is a schematic diagram of the performance screen displayed by the display performance device. It is a schematic diagram of the performance screen displayed by the display performance device. This is a drum pattern layout table. It is a combination display determination diagram of symbols. This is a payout table etc. when the accessory is not activated (during normal play, the specified number of coins is 3). It is a conceptual diagram showing a game state transition diagram and lottery probabilities of various winning combinations. It is a conceptual diagram showing lottery probabilities of various winning combinations. It is a conceptual diagram of a winning area of a small role. It is a conceptual diagram of a winning area of a small role. It is a figure showing an example of small role clear identification information. It is a diagram showing an example of re-gaming combination explicit identification information. It is a diagram showing an example of re-gaming combination explicit identification information. It is a diagram showing an example of re-gaming combination explicit identification information. This is the pattern arrangement of the drum. It is a configuration diagram of a push order small winning combination. It is a configuration diagram of a push order small winning combination. It is a configuration diagram of a replay role. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a flowchart showing the processing procedure up to the start of ART. 3 is a flowchart showing a bell replay processing subroutine. 7 is a flowchart showing a processing subroutine for special add-on zone D. It is a flowchart showing a freeze effect processing subroutine. It is a flowchart showing a freeze effect processing subroutine. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of a special addition screen. It is a schematic diagram of a special addition screen. It is a configuration diagram of a push order small winning combination. It is a configuration diagram of a push order small winning combination. It is a schematic diagram of a production screen. It is a flowchart which shows the transmission process procedure of winning combination information. It is a flowchart which shows the transmission process procedure of winning combination information. It is a configuration diagram of a push order small winning combination. It is a configuration diagram of a push order small winning combination. It is a flowchart which shows the transmission process procedure of winning combination information. FIG. 3 is a front view of the sanding device. It is a flowchart showing a settlement processing procedure. It is a block diagram of the control circuit system of the reel-type gaming machine. It is a schematic diagram of a display part and an operation part. It is a schematic diagram of a display part. It is a schematic diagram of a display part. It is a schematic diagram of a display part. It is a schematic diagram of a display part. This is the pattern arrangement of the drum. This is the payout table for BB general gaming (specified number of 3 coins) when the accessory is not activated. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of a window part in chronological order.

Definition:
In this specification, for convenience, the display of a combination of symbols related to re-gaming on the winning line will be referred to as "winning of re-gaming combination". However, the actual "winning" refers to the display of a predetermined combination of symbols necessary to win a game medal or the like.

The push order combination is a combination in which a prize-winning target combination and an inhibition combination are won at the same time, and the inhibition combination is composed of one or more types. The winning objective combination will win if the stop button is operated in the winning press order notified by the notification means, but if the stop button is operated in a different order from the winning press order, the inhibiting combination will win or what will happen. I won't win either. In other words, the inhibiting role is a role that inhibits the winning target role from winning a prize. For example, in the case of a push-order Bell role, there are three types of Bell minor role (15 pieces paid) as the winning objective role, 1 piece small role (1 piece paid) as the first inhibition minor role, and 2 pieces small role as the second inhibition minor role. Five winning combinations are internally won at the same time, and when the stop button is operated in the winning press order, the bell symbol is stopped on the active line, and a small bell winning combination is won. On the other hand, if the first stopping operation is not in the winning press order, the symbol of the first inhibiting minor combination will be stopped on the active line, so after that, either one of the first inhibiting minor symbols will win or will not win (missed). Become. If the first stop operation is in the winning press order and the second stop operation is not in the winning press order, the symbol of the second inhibiting small combination is stopped on the active line, so that the second inhibiting minor combination is subsequently won. It should be noted that the payout of the second hindering small hand may be set to one, or may be made to be missed. Other push order roles include push order replay roles.

Basic example:
A reel type game machine will be taken up as an example of a game machine etc. according to the present invention, and this embodiment will explain in detail the basic configuration and basic operation of the reel type game machine.

FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a reel-type gaming machine ((A) is an overall view, (B) is a front upper view), FIG. 2 is a right side view thereof, and FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a design panel.

Reference numeral 1 denotes a reel-type gaming machine body generally referred to as a "pachislot machine", which is roughly divided into a housing 1a containing a rotating drum (drum section 2) and a front door 1b (see especially FIG. 2). .

The front door 1b is the main part that can be called the face of a reel-type gaming machine, and a unique metallic feel is required to create a sense of luxury and design. By adding gold plating, metallizing (plating), satin-like (plating), etc. to resin materials, a gorgeous and solid appearance can be given to the exterior.

A transparent panel 21 is fitted into the front surface of the front door 1b. Further, a design panel 22 is attached to the front door 1b on the inside of the transparent panel 21.

The design panel 22 includes an upper surface portion 22a to which the display effect device 11 (or video display device) that performs various effects depending on the game situation is fixed with screws, and an inner surface portion in which a window portion 3 (symbol display window) is formed. 22b and a lower surface part 22c to which a light emitting display device (display LED block 4) is attached, form a bottom part 22d bent inward of the housing 1a, and a left side part 22e and a right side part 22f connect the left and right sides of the bottom part 22d. As a result, a substantially box-shaped and deep space is formed (see especially FIG. 3).

On this bottom part 22d, there is a decoration 23 that projects three-dimensionally or a three-dimensional electrically driven object 24 that is driven according to the progress of the game (for example, a decorative object 24 that is connected to an internal winning combination in order to arouse anticipation). There are electrically operated toys, doors that open and close, bumpers that move up and down, ships that rock, etc. used for the performance.However, there are also cases where a performance that is unrelated to the internal winning combination is simply performed.

The front door 1b and the design panel 22 are integrally molded from a resin material using a mold, and the molding methods are generally injection molding, extrusion molding, foam molding, vacuum molding, etc., and the resin material is ABS. Various general-purpose resins such as

2 is a drum section (reel drum) built into the housing 1a, and is composed of three drums: a left drum 2a, a middle drum 2b, and a right drum 2c. Inside each drum, a rotating drum part pattern display LED (not shown) is provided, and is adapted to emit light (turn on or blink) or turn off depending on various effects. In other words, each drum is a symbol row in which a plurality of symbols are displayed in a row from top to bottom, and in this case, a variable display game is started in which three symbol rows (multiple rows) are varied. Note that a case where symbols are displayed using a liquid crystal display device or the like instead of each drum also corresponds to a variable display game in which a symbol row in which a plurality of symbols are drawn is varied.

3 is a window provided at the center of the front of the design panel 22, through which the design on the reel tape attached (arranged or applied) to the outer periphery of the drum section 2 can be seen through the transparent panel 21. It looks like this. In this window part 3, there are a total of five effective lines, three effective lines extending in the horizontal direction and two effective lines intersecting diagonally. It is prominently displayed as a line connecting the drums 2c. However, the effective lines are not limited to the horizontal or diagonal directions, nor are they limited to the number of lines, but are appropriately determined at the design stage, such as a V-shape or a mound-shape on the contrary. Note that below this active line, a spinning drum line display LED is embedded, and it lights up or flashes when a prize is won or when the machine is activated.

Reference numeral 4 denotes a display LED block provided on the lower side of the window part 3 and on the lower surface of the design panel 22, which includes an input number LED 4a, a medal storage number display LED 4b, a medal payout number display LED 4c, and a replay display LED 4d, as described below. , an error display LED 4e, and a performance display LED 4f.

Reference numeral 5 denotes a medal insertion section, in which game medals (game media, sometimes referred to as "coins" or simply "medals") are used to start a variable display game that rotates and stops the drum section 2 (rotating drum). A medal slot is provided for inserting the coins. Note that a left light transmitting part 5a and a right light transmitting part 5b are provided on both sides of the medal insertion part 5, and the medals are exposed to light from a plurality of light sources (for example, LEDs) attached to the lower left and right sides. When the medals cannot be inserted, they are red (first color), when medals can be inserted and are added and displayed for gaming, they are blue (second color), and when they are added and displayed in the medal storage device, they are green. (third color). However, if medals cannot be inserted, the light may be turned off. In the game software, the game medium is data representing game medals or game coins (for example, the number of inserted medals, credit numerical data, or tokens), and the actual game medals or game coins are inserted from the medal insertion section 5. It is not something that will be done.

The medals inserted from the medal slot are counted by a medal sorting device (or also referred to as a "selector", not shown), and the number of correctly inserted medals is added up and displayed on the input number LED 4a of the LED block 4. Alternatively, it is displayed on the medal storage number display LED 4b.

Reference numeral 6 denotes a settlement button (or credit return switch), which is used to start and release a medal storage device (not shown), and to pay out and settle (return) inserted medals and stored medals. In particular, as will be described later, the gaming value is settled or returned by outputting the total value (gaming value) of the inserted medals and stored medals to the sand device connected to the gaming machine main body. For example, assuming that the number of inserted medals is 3 and the number of stored medals is 40 (total value of 43 credits), when the payment button is operated in this state, the gaming machine main body 1 transmits gaming value data. A total of 43 game values will be returned. When the sand machine receives gaming value data corresponding to a total of 43 coins from the gaming machine main body, the sand machine records the gaming value information on a built-in membership card or card-shaped information recording medium and discharges it outside the sand machine. Naturally, if 100 stored medals are recorded on the membership card, 143 new stored medals will be recorded.

7 is a 1 bet button, which is used when inserting one medal stored in the medal storage device in order to play a game. Incidentally, recently, the 1 bet button 7 is sometimes not provided. Further, a cross key (not shown) necessary for operating a cursor in up, down, left and right directions and viewing history information may be provided on the left side of the 1 bet button 7.

8 is a max bet button, which is used to insert the maximum number of medals stored in the medal storage device (3 medals) in order to play a game, or when playing a bonus game, etc. or 2 sheets: optimal number). Note that an LED is provided inside the max bet button 3, and lights up when the max bet button 3 is in an operable state.

Reference numeral 9 denotes a start lever (a part of the drum rotation starting device), which is used to start the drum section 2 all at once after inserting a predetermined number of game medals necessary for playing a game. An LED is provided around the start lever 9, and lights up when a start operation is possible. In addition, when setting the ball output rate in stages, the start lever 9 is used to set a desired setting value selected from stage values 1 to 6 (or 4-stage jump numbers of 1, 3, 5, 7, etc.). Used when confirming (re-typing).

Reference numeral 10 denotes a stop button section (also referred to as a "stop switch" as a synonym), which is used to stop the rotating drum section 2. This stop button unit 10 is composed of three button groups (in rare cases, there are four buttons): a left stop button 10a, a middle stop button 10b, and a right stop button 10c, and stops while the drum unit 2 is rotating. By operating the button section 10, the left drum 2a, middle drum 2b, and right drum 2c corresponding to each button can be stopped. Note that when the rotation of the three drums, the left drum 2a, the middle drum 2b, and the right drum 2c, reaches a predetermined speed (approximately 80 rotations/min) and the stop button section becomes operable, the stop button 10a and the stop button are pressed. The LEDs built into the stop button 10b and the stop button 10c are turned on. Furthermore, when the left stop button 10a, middle stop button 10b, and right stop button 10c are used as direction input means, they can be made to correspond to leftward, upward, and rightward inputs, respectively.

11 is a display presentation device consisting of a color display using a cathode ray tube, an LCD (liquid crystal display), a PDP (plasma display panel), or an FPD (flat panel display) such as an organic EL (electroluminescence); Under the control of a performance control section (not shown), various video performances and notification of necessary information regarding the rotating drum game can be performed. In addition, regardless of whether special glasses are used or not, recently, display production devices capable of 3D display have been manufactured at low cost, and 3D display devices that display production images such as 7 symbols in the reach state or jackpot state. Gaming machines that adopt this are becoming mainstream. The effect control section includes a ROM and a RAM, performs bidirectional communication with the sub-control section 160, and executes various effects according to received effect commands.

Reference numeral 12 denotes a speaker section, which is composed of four speakers: an upper left speaker 12a, an upper right speaker 12b, a lower left speaker 12c, and a lower right speaker 12d. A warning sound is generated when 1b is open or when a problem occurs. In addition, if a serious trouble (selector error, hopper error, or RAM error; however, door opening is not included) occurs, the error display LED 4e lights up along with a warning sound.

13 is a gaming status display LED section, which includes an upper status display LED 13a provided at the top of the display production device 11, an upper left status display LED 13b and an upper right status display LED 13c provided on both sides, a middle left status display LED 13d, and a middle right status display LED 13c. It is composed of a status display LED 13e, a lower left status display LED 13f, a lower right status display LED 13g, and a lower middle status display LED 13h, and can effectively perform various light effects. In addition, it repeatedly flashes as a warning display while changing the stage setting value, when the front door 1b is open, or when a trouble occurs.

The gaming status display LED unit 13 (13a to 13h) is arranged so as to go around the outer periphery of the front door 1b, so that the colorful light illuminates the player in circles around the outer periphery without interruption. It becomes possible to effectively create a rotating light effect. In particular, the upper status display LED 13a provided at the upper center position of the front door 1b (upper center position on the front of the gaming machine main body) is called a top lamp, and is a unique LED corresponding to an internally won or won rare small role. They play a central role in the light production, which lights up in color to inform players of winning combinations and arouse anticipation.

FIG. 1(B) shows an embodiment of a reel-type gaming machine housing in which a logo panel section 17, which will be described later, is eliminated and a top lamp 13a is made larger as a whole. This top lamp 13a is a fluctuating display game in which the drum parts are changed, and an internal winning combination is determined in advance by lottery, and when the three drum parts are stopped by operating a stop switch, it corresponds to the internal winning combination or the winning combination. After emitting light in a unique color (red for cherry, purple for plum, yellow for bell, blue for replay), it remains off during the interval period until the next variable display game starts, or a white color different from the unique color. It will be in a state where it will emit light in a neutral color such as.

It should be noted that a plurality of status display LEDs may be provided in the left and right spaces of the display effect device 11 (above the upper surface portion 22a) for notifying bonus winning announcements and necessary information. In addition, AT stock announcement lamps are provided in the left and right spaces of the drum section 2 (above the middle surface section 22b) to announce the winning of AT stock, and the left AT stock announcement lamp indicates that the number of AT stocks won is in the range of 1 to 9. When the AT stock number is 10 or more, the two AT stock notification lamps on the left and right light up.

14 is a special button, which provides information required according to the various games and video effects displayed on the display effect device 11 (for example, increasing the power level gauge, displaying bonus winning symbols, operating machine guns of fighter jets, etc.). Input information such as dropping a bomb or moving direction of a character) is input by the player himself or herself by a single operation or by repeatedly hitting the input information. In particular, when the special button 14 is won in the AT stock lottery, it flashes with a sound effect of "beep beep" to prompt the player to operate it, and when the player hits the special button 14 with expectation, it produces an effect of "paki paki pakkin". A sound is generated and the AT stock notification lamp lights up. Note that the information input by this special button 14 is given to a sub-board (sub-block) which will be described later, and is used only for various video and sound effects, so it does not affect the game results.

Reference numeral 15 denotes a receiving tray, from which game medals paid out from the medal dispensing device 18 (see FIG. 4) are discharged from the medal dispensing opening 16, and can receive up to several hundred medals.

Reference numeral 17 denotes a logo panel section, which is used to display various trademarks, such as the manufacturer's name or model name, as needed.

Reference numeral 19 denotes a door keyhole, which is used to open the front door 1b of the drum-type gaming machine main body 1 with the door key, to cancel the stopped state (a state in which operations for medal-type games are disabled), and to cancel the game due to an error. Used when canceling.

Reference numeral 20 denotes a return button (officially referred to as a "return button for jammed inserted medals"), which removes game medals stuck in a game medal selector (not shown) through which the game medals pass following the medal insertion section 5. Used when returning from payout port 16.

Referring now to FIG. 3, the design panel 22 shown in FIG. ) and a lower surface 22c to which the display LED block 4 described above is attached form a bottom surface 22d, and a three-dimensional decoration or a three-dimensional electric drive is formed on the upper surface of the bottom surface 22d. things are provided.

In addition, the left side part 22e and right side part 22f that connect the bottom part 22d form a substantially box-shaped (or substantially ship-shaped) space, and a deep space is formed inside, and the upper and lower parts thereof are for attaching to the front door 1b. An upper mounting portion 22g and a lower mounting portion 22h are provided in which a plurality of mounting holes are formed. By pasting decorative stickers on the five inner surfaces of the bottom surface portion 22d, left side surface portion 22e, and right side surface portion 22f, three approximately flat surfaces are formed, particularly on the bottom surface portion 22d. However, since the decorations 23 and the electrically driven objects 24 are provided, it is natural that there are irregularities.

Reference numeral 4a is an input number LED, which displays the number of game medals input from the medal input unit 5 or by the max bet button 8 or 1 bet button 7 for playing the game.

4b is an LED for displaying the number of stored medals, and displays the number of game medal credits (the number of stored medals) within a predetermined maximum number of 50, for example. In addition, a payout effect display is performed when paying out stored medals.

4c is an LED for displaying the number of medals to be paid out, and displays the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning. It also displays the stage setting value of the ball output rate and the error code when the game is stopped or an error occurs.

4d is a replay display LED, which lights up when replay is activated in a variable display game.

4e is an error display LED, which lights up when a serious trouble (for example, trouble other than opening the door) occurs.

4f is a performance display LED, which lights up to indicate that the drum section 2 is performing a performance. In other words, it is displayed that the drum performance is in progress.

The design panel 22 shown in FIG. 3(B) is different from that shown in FIG. 3(A) in that a top surface portion 22i is further provided as a bent surface (edge). The provision of this uppermost surface portion 22i is advantageous in that the attached display effect device 11 can be easily seen by the player and that the design panel itself is further strengthened.

FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the drum-type gaming machine.

In the center of the casing 1a of the drum-type gaming machine main body 1, a drum section 2 and a medal payout device 18 (medal hopper 18) are arranged below the drum section 2.

A reflecting plate 27 is provided at the upper right of the housing 1a, and a photosensor is provided at a corresponding position on the front door 1b. When the front door 1b is closed, the LED light emitted from the photosensor is reflected. While the reflected light is reflected by the plate and detected by the phototransistor, the reflected light is not detected in the open state, so it is possible to detect the open/closed state of the front door 1b.

Reference numeral 28 denotes a power supply section, and when the power switch 28c is turned on, power is supplied to each circuit block, and after initial checks and initial settings, a variable display game can be played.

Reference numeral 28a denotes a setting key switch (also referred to as a setting change permission switch), which is used when setting the ball output rate in stages and confirming the stage setting values. By inserting the operation key into the keyhole 28d and rotating it, the state can be changed from OFF to ON, or vice versa.

Reference numeral 28b is an error release switch, which is used when setting the ball payout rate in stages or when canceling a game stop due to an error.

4c is an LED for displaying the number of medals to be paid out, which displays the stage setting value of the payout rate, and each time the error release switch 28b is pressed, the value is incremented by 1, and after displaying ``6'', it changes to ``1''. Return and display turnaround.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram of the control circuit system of the reel-type gaming machine.

The control circuit system is roughly divided into the main block (main board: the part not enclosed by the broken line) and the sub-block (subboard: the part enclosed by the broken line). The sub-block is in charge of controlling various effects that attract the interest of players, such as notification and display of game progress and internal lottery results. In addition, the sub-block announces the stop operation procedure (operation order and operation timing of the stop button section 10) for winning a small winning combination or avoiding falling replay when ART is activated.

100 is the main control unit, which is an integrated one-chip microcomputer (LE4380A-PA-S manufactured by EL Tech) equipped with a microprocessor with a built-in CPU, which controls the predetermined data table area and control procedures for the entire device. A ROM 101 stores a control program written with a ROM 101, and a RAM 102 (also called RWM: rewritable memory), which has counters, registers, etc. and temporarily stores information necessary for control.It also includes not only built-in RAM but also external RAM. .) is provided. As will be described later, even if the power switch 28c is turned off or the power cord is unplugged, all control data stored in the RAM 102 is retained by the RAM backup power that is constantly supplied via the power connector. However, if the power connector itself is unplugged, power will no longer be supplied, so the control data will be erased (all cleared or reset to 0) or become meaningless information.

A start SW sensor 110 (start switch sensor 110), a stop button sensor 120, a medal detection sensor 130, and a bet button sensor 140 are connected to the main control unit 100 via an I/0 port (not shown) and a data bus. , the stage setting section 150, the stop setting section 180, and the payment button sensor are connected, and the main control section 100 is configured to be able to receive input signals from these.

Further, the drum section 2, medal payout device 18, display LED block 4, and external centralized terminal board 170 are connected to the main control section 100 via an I/0 port (not shown) and a data bus. The main control unit 100 is configured to be able to control each of these devices by transmitting and receiving input/output signals. An index signal of one pulse per rotation is input from each index sensor provided in the drum section 2 to the main control section 100.

The main control unit 100 outputs information necessary for totalizing and managing the operating status of gaming machines at pachislot parlors etc. from the external centralized terminal board 170, but does not receive any information from the external centralized terminal board 170. . The signals that the main control unit 100 outputs to the outside include a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, an external output signal 1 (for example, a BB signal or a pseudo BB signal), an external output signal 2 (for example, an RB signal or a pseudo RB signal), These are an external output signal 3 (for example, an AT signal), an external output signal 4 (for example, a signal indicating that various errors have occurred), an external output signal 5 (for example, a trivia detection signal), and a relay common signal. In particular, the BB signal and RB signal are used as bonus winnings, and the AT signal is a special winning assist bonus winning (called the "third bonus winning") that is not only aggregated and managed by the hall computer, but also It is also output to a data counter installed near the top, and is used to display to the player the main information of the pachislot game (number of games, number of BBs, number of ARTs, ball information).

This main control unit 100 internally extracts one of the random numbers (values from 0 to 65535) that are continuously generated by the built-in random number generation unit 103 in accordance with the player's operation of the start lever 9. Drum portion 2 (left drum 2a, middle drum 2b, and right drum 2c) is a three-row (multiple row) pattern row in which a lottery is executed and a plurality of symbols (usually 20 or 21) are drawn. The symbol variation display game is started by rotating . For example, when a small winning combination with a payout, such as a bell, cherry, watermelon, or plum, is internally won in this random number lottery and the player performs a stop operation on the stop button section 10, the main control section 100 operates according to the order of operations. The drum section 2 is sequentially stopped at predetermined positions. As a result, if the predetermined symbols are displayed side by side on any of the five active lines in the window 3, the player wins a prize. However, the number of active lines is not limited to five, and may vary depending on the number of medals inserted, or may be increased or decreased as appropriate depending on design specifications or gaming conditions.

For example, if we assume that the number of payouts for gaming media stipulated according to the type of winning is 1 bell, 2 cherries, 5 watermelons, and 8 plums, only the bell symbols will be displayed side by side on the second line. If so, the main control unit 100 pays out one coin as a bell winning prize. If the prescribed number of coins to be inserted is 3, even if Bell wins, it will be deducted by 2 coins, so if the bonus role and minor role are internally won at the same time, priority will be given to the internally won minor role symbol. Even if you stop on the active line, medals can be consumed. On the other hand, if the bell symbol is displayed on the second line and the plum symbol is displayed on the third line, the main control unit 100 pays out the winning amount of 1 bell and 8 plums, totaling 9 pieces. This will be a positive payout of 6 coins.

A sub-control unit 160 and a credit control unit 165 are connected to the main control unit 100 via an I/0 port (not shown) and a data bus. Basically, various information can be sent from the main control section 100 to both control sections, but conversely, the main control section 100 cannot receive information from both control sections (i.e., one-way communication from the main control section 100 to both control sections). connected). However, only credit data consisting of 2 bits can be received from the credit control unit 165 via the data input circuit 166 (for example, two NOT circuits). This credit data is 2-bit data of 00 indicating 0 credits, 01 indicating 1 credit, 10 indicating 2 credits, and 11 indicating 3 or more credits. It is input as a High or Low signal to two input ports.

The main control unit 100 provides the sub-control unit 160 with control data necessary for various controls of the sub-blocks (for example, coin insertion data, lottery results and winning situation data, stage setting value data, switch operation status of the stage setting unit 150). data shown) is output to the sub-control unit 160. Similar to the main control unit 100, the sub-control unit 160 is an integrated one-chip microcomputer equipped with a microprocessor with a built-in CPU, and includes a ROM 161 that stores a control program that describes control procedures for the entire sub-block. A RAM 162 is provided in which counters, timers, registers, etc. are formed, and information necessary for control received from the main control unit 100 is temporarily stored. This ROM 161 stores a plurality of BGM (background music) data, and in order to lift the player's spirits, especially during bonus games, specially arranged BGM is played according to the performance scene. Selected and performed as appropriate. Note that it is not necessary to provide the main control section 100 and the sub-control section 160 separately, and it is also possible to provide them as one control section.

The sub-control unit 160 has a display effect device 11, a speaker unit 12, a gaming status display LED unit 13, an input SW unit 25 (input switch unit 25), A clock section 26, an operation direction sensor 111, a special button sensor 112, and a door abnormality signal output device 113 are connected, and the sub-control section 160 receives input signals from these devices and outputs necessary data and signals. It is possible to perform various controls using

The sub-control unit 160 determines the difference in the number of coins after initialization and the variable display game played after the bonus based on the input number data, payout number data, and variable display game number data in the control data transmitted from the main control unit 100. The number of times is counted, and when the counted difference number or number of times reaches a predetermined number, an AT stock lottery or a selection game is activated. At this time, the sub-control unit 160 displays the message "Do you want to start the selection game? To start, please press the special button repeatedly" on the display effect device 11, and causes the special button 14 to blink.

In this AT stock lottery, the number of stocks is drawn, for example, in the range of 0 to 127, where 0 is a loss, while 1 to 127 is a win. If 127 is won, a minimum of 127 consecutive wins will be guaranteed, but since the AT stock lottery is executed even when AT is stocked, an additional amount will be added and it will be possible to save up to MAX 10,000. However, these are merely examples based on design specifications, and are not limited to these values.

Further, the sub-control unit 160 confirms whether or not to execute the selection game, and when the player repeatedly presses the special button, receives a pulse signal corresponding to the number of times the player presses the special button repeatedly, and the sub-control unit 160 receives a pulse signal corresponding to the number of times the player repeatedly presses the special button, and the sub-control unit 160 receives a pulse signal corresponding to the number of times the player repeatedly presses the special button. When the number is reached, a selection game lottery is performed to determine a winning number (for example, "0" or "1"). Then, when the selection game is activated, the display effect device 11 displays "○ or encourage. For example, when "0" is won in the selection game lottery result, if the player operates the left stop button 10a and selects the corresponding "○" or "left", the selection game is won. Then, when the sub-control unit 160 determines that the winning is won, in the subsequent variable display game, the AT stock lottery (1 to 127 The AT function (function of notifying auxiliary information by means of notification) is activated for the number of times the player has won a prize.

On the other hand, if the player operates the right stop button 10c and selects the corresponding "x" or "right", the player loses the selection game. Then, when the sub-control unit 160 determines that the selection is unsuccessful, the sub-control unit 160 initializes the difference number of sheets or the number of variable display games without activating the AT function, and returns to the start. As a result, even if a player is addicted to the game, if he or she wins in the selection game, he or she can recover more than what he or she had previously lost, or even be able to play Dalian, and can expect an instant turnaround. In the above example, if the player selects two options and wins, the payout is 2x, but if there are 5 options, it is also possible to return 5x when the player wins, and it would be even more interesting to allow the player to select the multiplier. Increase.

When the main control unit 100 internally executes a random number lottery in response to the start operation of the start lever 9, and receives notification of the result of jackpot, replay, small win, or loss, the sub-control unit 160 notifies the player of the lottery result. Before notifying the player, a performance lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform a performance on the display performance device 11, speaker section 12, and gaming status display LED section 13. When the sub-control unit 160 wins the performance lottery, the sub-control unit 160 selects a performance video to be displayed from among the plurality of performance videos stored in the ROM 161 and outputs it to the display performance device 11.

In particular, the sub-control unit 160, as described later, when AT stock exists and the push order minor winning combination (the first minor winning combination and a plurality of parts of the plurality of pressing order specified minor winning combinations) is internally won, Assist information (auxiliary information) for aligning the winning first minor role symbols (for example, bell symbols) on the active line is displayed on the display performance device 11. This allows the player to easily win the first small winning combination.

Returning to FIG. 5, the credit control unit 165 is connected to the sand machine 300, and when set to the sand mode described later, the credit control unit 165 stores credit information corresponding to the cash inserted by the player,
Alternatively, credit information such as a member card, visitor card, cash card, prepaid card, etc., which is a recording medium, is received and the frequency information or credit information is displayed. When the player operates the lending button 167, 50 for 1000 yen is added and displayed on the stored credit display section. For example, if the storage credit display section is displaying 1, 50 is added to 1 to display 51, but only a maximum of 99 is displayed. Further, the credit control unit 165 changes the state in which the data input circuit 166 inputs data 01 to the state in which it inputs data 11 indicating the number of credits 3 or more. When the max bet button 8 is operated in this state, the main control unit 100 lights up three input number LEDs 4a and outputs input data to the credit control unit 165 indicating that 3 credits have been input as the number of bets. . The credit control unit 165 causes the stored credit display unit to display 48, which is the value obtained by subtracting 3 credits. In this state, when the player operates the settlement button 190 (credit return switch), the main control unit 100 transmits bet number data indicating the bet number of 3. Upon receiving this bet number data, the credit control unit 165 transmits return credit information (gaming value) indicating that the return credit is 51 (48+3) to the sand machine 300. The sanding device 300 adds 51 of the returned credit to the membership card or the like, records the cash balance, and discharges the card. Note that when a replay role (replay role) is won and the player operates the settlement button in a state where the next game can be executed, the main control unit 100 transmits the number of bets data indicating the number of bets of 0. , the credit control unit 165 transmits returned credit information (gaming value) indicating that the number of returned credits is 48 to the sand machine 300. The sanding device 300 adds 48 returned credits to the member card or the like, records the cash balance, and discharges the card to the outside, but the main control section 100 outputs a warning command to the sub-control section 160. The sub-control unit 160 causes the display effect device 11 to display a warning screen, and causes the speaker unit 12 to generate a warning sound to inform the player that it is possible to play again.

The operation direction sensor 111 outputs a direction signal corresponding to the up, down, left, and right directions in which the start lever 9 is operated, and the sub-control unit 160 receives this direction signal and performs various video productions and winning announcements according to the direction signal. etc. are displayed on the display performance device 11, and sound effects are generated from the speaker section 12.

The special button sensor 112 outputs an ON signal (for example, a HIGH signal) when the special button 14 is operated and an OFF signal (for example, a LOW signal) when it is released, and the sub-control unit 160 receives this ON signal. Depending on the timing and the number of pulses received (referred to as consecutive hits), various games, their video effects, winning announcements, etc. are displayed on the display effect device 11. Further, the speaker section 12 generates sound effects such as bomb dropping and machine gun operation.

The door abnormality signal output device 113 is a device that detects the open/close state of the door and outputs a control signal to the sub-control unit 160. When the main power is ON, the door abnormality signal output device 113 outputs an ON/OFF signal according to the opening/closing of the front door 1b. On the other hand, when the main power is off, it is driven by the power supplied from the auxiliary power supply (backup battery), detects and stores abnormal opening and closing of the front door 1b when the main power is turned off, and then the main power is turned off. Even if it is turned ON, the sub-control unit 160 is notified of abnormal opening/closing when the main power is turned off. As a result, even if the front door 1b is closed and there appears to be no abnormality, the sub-control unit 160 generates a warning sound when the main power is turned on, so that the manager of the game hall is aware of the abnormal situation. , can take appropriate measures such as checking and inspecting the gaming machine.

The medal detection sensor 130 is composed of a medal passage sensor and a proximity sensor (not shown), and outputs a number of pulse signals corresponding to the number of medals inserted from the medal slot 5. The main control unit 100 receives this pulse signal, executes counter logic processing at the rise and fall of the pulse signal, and sets the input number LED 4a or the stored medal number display LED 4b in the display LED block 4 according to the number of pulses. The number of inserted coins or the number of credits increased by the number of credits is displayed.

The bet button detection sensor 140 includes a 1 bet button detection sensor 140a that outputs a pulse signal in response to the operation of the 1 bet button 7, and a max bet button detection sensor 140b that outputs a pulse signal in response to the operation of the max bet button 8. It consists of two ports and is separately connected to two ports of the main control unit 100 (details not shown). The main control unit 100 controls the number of sheets input LED 4a to display the number of sheets in response to the obtained pulse signal.

Further, when the player operates the start lever 9 after inserting a predetermined number of medals, the start SW sensor 110 outputs a start signal, and the main control unit 100 uses the reception of this start signal as an opportunity to perform a random number lottery, etc. At the same time as starting the variable display game, a drive pulse signal is output to the drum section 2. The game played by operating the start lever 9 once is a variable display game, and the player aims to increase the number of medals by winning a bonus game (big bonus or regular bonus). Repeat the game. Incidentally, the bonus game means, for example, the first type special bonus (RB), the first type special bonus continuous operation, or the second type special bonus continuous operation.

Then, when the stop buttons 10a, 10b, and 10c are operated during the variable display game, the main control unit 100 stops the rotation of the rotating drums, and a predetermined winning combination is established (the symbols on each rotating drum are set in advance). If the medals are displayed in a predetermined combination, you win a prize. The stored number of sheets is displayed on the LED 4b. Note that when a payout operation is performed using the payment button 6 or when the number of credits exceeds the maximum number of 50, the main control unit 100 drives and controls the medal payout device 18 to dispense the required number of medals. It is discharged from the dispensing port 16 and accumulated in the tray 15.

Furthermore, when a re-game or a small winning combination, especially a bonus, is won internally, the main control section 100 outputs control data (event data) regarding the internal winning etc. to the sub-control section 160. When the sub-control unit 160 receives the control data from the main control unit 100, the sub-control unit 160 controls the lighting of the gaming status display LED unit 13 and controls the voice synthesis LSI (not shown) for generating sound effects from the speaker unit 12. , and is configured to perform various presentation operations such as controlling the display of characters and background images within the display screen of the display presentation device 11.

Reference numeral 150 denotes a stage setting section, and by performing the stage setting operation of the ball output rate, which will be described later, the hall can set the stage value according to the release of a large number of medals at events and new openings, and the collection status for improving profits. A desired setting value can be selected from 1 to 6 (or consecutive numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, etc.).

If the stop setting section (not shown) is on (or "1"), after the bonus game ends, the total amount of medals displayed on the input number LED 4a and the medal storage number display LED 4b is forcibly paid out, An operation for playing a variable display game is disabled (stopped) and a warning sound is generated from a speaker section 12. Incidentally, recently, there are many slot machines that are not provided with this stop setting section, but it is provided as necessary.

Reference numeral 25 denotes an input SW section (input switch section) for inputting various data, such as setting a warning mode when a stage setting operation of the ball output rate is performed, and a time period when a warning is to be generated or not to be generated. Configure settings. This warning mode includes three modes: an on state or an off state of the warning generation function, and a timer state in which a warning is generated only in a set time period. The input SW section 25 consists of an initialization switch for initializing the sub-block and a volume switch used for switching the volume of the speaker section 12, and becomes functional when both are pressed at the same time. ing.

Reference numeral 26 denotes a timekeeping unit consisting of a radio clock that receives absolute time data from a satellite or the like and keeps accurate time, and continues to output the measured time to the sub-control unit 160.

FIG. 6 is a block diagram of a control circuit system that controls the drum section.

The drum unit 2 includes step motors 30a, 30b, and 30c for rotationally controlling three drums, a left drum 2a, a middle drum 2b, and a right drum 2c, and responds to drive pulse signals from the main control unit 100. When the step motors 30a, 30b, and 30c are driven, and drive pulse signals are continuously supplied to three phases at the same time, an attractive force is generated and the motors suddenly stop.

These step motors 30a, 30b, and 30c have a 4-phase 1-2 excitation system and the number of steps is 252 steps/rotation (1.43 degrees/step), and when the main controller 100 inputs 504 drive pulse signals, exactly Rotate once. The main control unit 100 receives one pulse of each index signal (reference signal or reference position signal) from the drum sensors 31a, 31b, and 31c, each consisting of a photointerrupter provided on each drum. The location can be accurately determined. In other words, the resolution with one input pulse is 0.714 (degrees/pulse). Note that if the resolution is to be further increased, the rotational position can be grasped in detail by managing the time from one input pulse to the next input pulse and the rotational speed.

FIG. 7 is a block diagram of the configuration of the drum section.

The center portions of the left drum 2a, the middle drum 2b, and the right drum 2c, which are thick-walled disc-shaped rotating bodies, are connected to the rotating shafts of the step motors 30a (not shown), 30b (not shown), and 30c, respectively. and rotates in the direction of the arrow shown (ie, from top to bottom). Furthermore, on the outer periphery of each drum, a left rotation belt 32a, a middle rotation belt 32b, and a right rotation belt 32c, on which multiple types of symbols are drawn, are attached. If the predetermined symbols) are lined up on the active line and displayed on the window 3, the prize is established (winning or activation). Note that the star mark, + mark, plum mark (black circle mark), and triangle mark in the same figure are shown for convenience and are different from the actual ones. Designs are commonly used. Additionally, the rotation belt is generally called a reel tape.

Reel sensors 31a, 31b, and 31c (not shown) are provided for each of the step motors 30a, 30b, and 30c, and one pulse of the index signal is returned from each reel sensor for each rotation of the step motor. It's starting to come. The main control unit 100 constantly grasps the symbol number and rotation angle (24 divisions/symbol) at the reference position (for example, the bottom position of the window section 3) based on this index signal and the number of output drive pulse signals. ing.

FIG. 8 is a drum symbol arrangement table.

On each of the left drum 2a, the middle drum 2b, and the right drum 2c, a drum band (not shown) on which a left drum pattern, a middle drum pattern, and a right drum pattern are drawn is arranged so that it goes around the outer periphery of each drum. It is attached to.

As shown in the example, each belt has 21 symbols drawn in different arrangements, including the big bonus symbols "Red 7" and "Blue 7" that activate the bonus, and the cherry winning symbols of various small prizes. , a watermelon, a bell, and a replay in which a replay is activated. Note that even if the discard symbols stop on the active line, they do not constitute any combination, and "N" is printed in a circle in light gray, for example, so as not to be noticeable to the player.

FIG. 9 is a block diagram of the configuration of the drum section, and FIGS. 9A and 9B chronologically show states in which the right drum 2c is controlled to retract.

The main control unit 100 receives the start signal of the variable display game, and when the lottery result is a winning result and the winning combination is internally won, the main control unit 100 performs pull-in control to draw the symbols of the winning combination onto the active line as much as possible. conduct.

For example, when the big bonus role is internally won and the symbols "7, 7" are aligned on the active line diagonally to the lower right of the stopped left drum 2a and middle drum 2b, the so-called reach state is reached, and the player wins 4 frames above this active line. If the symbol "7" is located within 5 frames (that is, within 5 frames including the symbol on the active line), when the right stop button 10c is operated to stop (see FIG. 9(A)), the main The control unit 100 performs a pull-in control to forcibly pull the symbol "7" onto the active line and align it so as to form a combination of "7, 7, 7" (see FIG. 9(B)).

On the other hand, even if one of the winning combinations is internally won through the lottery, the player will not be in an advantageous state unless a predetermined symbol corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on the active line. For example, the big bonus game (BB game) does not operate unless it is displayed as shown in FIG. 9(B). Note that this retraction control is performed not only on the right drum 2c but also on any of the symbols on the left drum 2a and middle drum 2b. The main control unit 100 performs stop control by referring to a stop table that defines the stop position of each drum depending on the random number lottery situation (internal winning or losing).

In the example of FIG. 9, in the ready-to-reach state, the symbol "7" on the right drum 2c is exactly four frames above, and is subject to pull-in control so that it is lined up on the active line. However, this pull-in control is not limited to four frames, and the number of pull-in frames can be increased or decreased by software control to adapt to design specifications or legal regulations. Furthermore, when the random number lottery result is a winning result in a general game, the sub-control unit 160 provides auxiliary information (operation order, Assist information such as operation timing (AT) is notified.

FIG. 10 is a block diagram of the configuration of the drum section, and FIGS. 10(A) and 10(B) chronologically show states in which the right drum 2c is subjected to avoidance control (or kicking control).

The main control unit 100 receives the start signal of the variable display game, and if the lottery result is a loss and the winning combination is not established (when all the winning combinations are not internally won), the main control unit 100 receives the start signal of the variable display game, and if the lottery result is a loss and the winning combination is not established (when all the winning combinations are not internally won), the main control unit 100 enters a prize on the active line or operates. Evasion control is performed to prevent the symbols of the winning combination (bonus, small winning combination, replay) from lining up.

For example, in a reach state (tenpai state) where the big bonus role has not been internally won and the symbols "7, 7" are aligned on the active line diagonally to the lower right of the stopped left drum 2a and middle drum 2b, the game When a person operates the stop button 10c with the symbol "7" located within one frame from this active line due to "eye press" (for example, this is called "bita push". Fig. 10 (See A)), the main control unit 100 performs avoidance control to forcefully move the symbol "7" one place ahead so that "7, 7, 7" does not line up on the active line ( (See FIG. 10(B)). This avoidance control is performed not only on the right drum 2c but also on any of the symbols on the left drum 2a and the middle drum 2b, and avoidance control is performed to prevent non-winning minor winning symbols from winning. It looks like this. These pull-in control and avoidance control (kick-off control) are performed by the main control unit 100 by referring to a stop table according to the internal winning situation or by control by a program.

FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing the relationship among the index signal, symbol position data (frame data), drive pulse signal, and stop button sensor signal.

FIG. 11(A) shows the index signals output from each drum sensor 31a, 31b, and 31c, and the main control is performed so that T1 is constant at 0.751 seconds (that is, 79.9 revolutions/minute). 100.

FIG. 11(B) shows the symbol position data of the rotating drum, and FIG. 11(C) shows the drive pulse signal.

The symbol position data is generated by frequency-dividing the drive pulse signal, and the data is subtracted by 1 every 24 pulses of the drive pulse signal. In other words, based on the index signal, when the drive pulse signal is in the range of 1 to 24 pulses, the symbol position data is "21", and when the drive pulse signal is in the range of 25 to 48 pulses, the symbol position data is "20", When the drive pulse signal is in the range of 49 pulses to 72 pulses, the symbol position data is "19", ..., when the drive pulse signal is in the range of 481 pulses to 504 pulses, the symbol position data is "1", and the symbol position data is 21 to 1. turnaround. In other words, the symbol position data returns to "21" after "1".

The drive pulse signal is a drive pulse of a prescribed pattern that is input to the motor coil in order to rotate the rotating drum in a certain direction, and as can be seen from the figure, there are eight pattern numbers, patterns 0 to 7. When pattern numbers 0 to 7 are repeatedly applied to the motor coil phases 1 to 4 as drive pulse signals three times (in other words, when 24 pulses are input), the rotating drum rotates from top to bottom by one pattern (one frame). do.

In particular, the input pulse phase data of the drive pulse input to the step motor is 5-bit data from 0 to 23 that drives the rotating drum one frame, and pattern numbers 0 to 7 are the phase data of the lower 3 bits. Then, drive pulses corresponding to the pattern numbers are actually applied to the motor coil phases 1 to 4. Therefore, even if only the pattern number is stored in the work RAM (RAM 102), it corresponds to phase data storage means for storing input pulse phase data.

FIG. 11(D) shows stop button sensor signals output when each stop button is operated. In the case of this figure, the main control unit 100 recognizes the symbol position data "11" and the input pulse phase data "10" (or pattern number "2") at the time of the rise of the stop button sensor signal.

FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of the left drum 2a included in the drum section.

As shown in FIG. 12(A), this left drum 2a is rotating in the direction of the arrow (from top to bottom), and there is a cherry pattern on either the top, middle, or bottom of the three windows 3 shown by solid lines. When it stops, a prize is awarded and a predetermined number of game medals are paid out. Note that FIG. 12(A) shows a state in which the cherry pattern is stopped at the upper stage of the window portion 3.

When the player performs the start operation of the variable display game, the main control unit 100 performs an internal lottery, and if the top cherry (cherry 1) is won as a result, the main control unit 100 controls the position (timing) at which the stop button was operated. ), the cherry symbol retraction control (see FIG. 9) or avoidance control (see FIG. 10) is performed.

FIG. 12(B) shows a possible range of retraction control, and when the stop button 10a is operated at a position where the cherry pattern is exactly four frames above the top row, the main control unit 100 The cherry symbol is stopped at the upper row of 3 (assuming that the bitter symbol is at the upper row position). In addition,
In reality, it takes about 36 ms to stop, so it is positioned higher by that amount, but it is written this way for convenience of explanation. Further, since it is specified that the camera should stop within 190 ms from the stop operation, there are cases where the camera does not slip four frames.

On the other hand, FIG. 12(C) and FIG. 12(D) show the range in which avoidance control etc. are performed, and the main control unit 100 can control the cherry pattern from the top position to four positions even if the top cherry is won. If the stop button 10a is operated at a position above the frame (that is, a position above 4 in FIG. 12(A)) or at a position even slightly past the upper position, the stop button 10a The cherry pattern will stop at the bottom and you will lose. In other words, since the middle cherry (cherry 2) or the lower cherry (cherry 3) has not been won, the cherry symbol must be forcibly stopped outside the window 3.

FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the left drum 2a, the window 3, and symbol position data.

As shown in FIGS. 13(A) and 13(B), the cherry symbols on the left drum 2a are frame numbers 8 and 19 (see FIG. 8), so if the top cherry is internally won, the window When the lowest position of section 3 is used as a measurement reference, the main control section 100 selects symbol position data "15", input pulse phase data "0" to symbol position data "11" and input pulse phase data "23", or When the stop button 10a is operated within the range of position data "5" and input pulse phase data "0" to symbol position data "1" and input pulse phase data "23", the cherry symbol is stopped in the upper row and a prize is won. . In other words, not only will you have a 10/21 chance of winning even if you press the stop button 10a at random, but if you announce the winning, a skilled player can win with a probability of close to 100% by pressing their eyes. .

FIG. 14 is a symbol combination display determination diagram.

When all three drums have stopped, the main control unit 100 determines the display of combinations of symbols related to winning and activation on the active line according to the number of game medals inserted. For example, if three game medals are inserted and the cherry symbol of the left drum 2a that pays out two medals is displayed on the window 3, if it is in the upper row, there will be four medals (2 medals x 2 lines: the second line and 4 lines), 2 game medals (2 medals x 1 line: 1st line) for the middle row, and 4 game medals (2 medals x 2 lines: 3rd line and 5th line) for the lower row. However, this effective line is a common line that has been used in the past, and as will be described later, there are many irregular lines in recent years.

In addition, if 8 bell symbols are displayed on the active line of window 3, if it is only in the middle row, 8 cards (8 cards x 1 line: 1st line), or if it is in the upper row and diagonally lower right. For example, 15 game medals (8 medals x 2 lines, but a maximum of 15 medals: 2nd line and 4th line) are paid out. In other words, the number of game media prescribed according to the type of winning is summed up and paid out for the winning amount, but the maximum that can be paid out at one time is 15 pieces.

FIG. 15 is a configuration block diagram of the display production device.

The display production device 11 includes a command reception unit 11a that receives production commands from the sub-control unit 160, a display production control unit 11b (including ROM 11c and RAM 11d), and a display panel 11e such as an LCD, organic EL, or LED. There is. In this case, a ROM 11c is separately provided in the display effect control section 11b, but there is no problem even if all the video data is stored in the ROM 161. Therefore, the ROM 11c may be considered as part of the ROM 161.

FIG. 16 is a presentation pattern table that associates presentation commands with presentation pattern data stored in the ROM.

The production command consists of 1-byte length mode data and 1-byte length event data, and is stored in association with production pattern data (mainly videos, but still images are also included), which is the content of the production. .

When the sub-control unit 160 receives control data necessary for various controls from the main control unit 100 (particularly includes various data indicating jackpot, small-win, replay, or loss of random number lottery results), the sub-control unit 160 generates a random number. Before notifying the result of the lottery, an appropriate performance command according to the control data is transmitted to the display performance device 11 side, and the command receiving section 11a receives this performance command and transmits it to the display performance control section 11b.

When the display performance control unit 11b receives the performance command, it reads the performance pattern data corresponding to the performance command from the ROM 11c, develops the data in the RAM 11d, and sends it to the display panel 11e, thereby displaying the performance image according to the performance command. It is configured to be displayed on the screen.

17 to 19 are schematic diagrams of presentation screens displayed by the display presentation device.

When the sub-control unit 160 transmits, for example, ($Z0$00) as a performance command, the display panel 11e displays the "daytime performance pattern" of a low probability stage that mainly indicates a state where there is no AT stock or a state where AT is difficult to win. 0" is displayed (see FIG. 17(A)). On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 160 transmits ($Y0$00) as a performance command, the display panel 11e displays the "Night of the Night" high-probability stage that suggests a state where there is AT stock or a high-probability state where AT is likely to win. Effect pattern 0'' is displayed (see FIG. 17(B)). Therefore, players desire to see a "night performance stage" that mainly suggests a high probability state during a game. However, it is also possible to fake a "night performance stage" that displays a "night performance stage" even when there is no AT stock or a low probability state, or vice versa, to display a "daytime performance stage" when there is an AT stock or a high probability state. It is designed to attract players' interest.

Furthermore, when the sub-control unit 160 transmits ($S0$00) as a production command, the display panel 11e displays "Dracula's Castle", which is an image corresponding to "castle production pattern 0", superimposed on the blue sky background screen. (See Figure 17 (A)) or displayed over the moonlit background screen (See Figure 17 (B)), and then a yellow, red, or blue bat flies out from Dracula's castle. A notification image corresponding to the winning combination (small winning combination or replay) is displayed (see FIG. 17(C)).

If the effect shown in FIG. 17(B) occurs frequently and then develops into multiple stages, it becomes a premonitory effect (super hot effect) in which AT stock is present or AT is expected to be released. For example, FIG. 18A shows "Dracula's Castle" enlarged and the iron gate opened. Then, the door further enlarges (see FIG. 18(B)), gradually opens (see FIG. 18(C)), and the glittering interior of "Dracula's Castle" is displayed (see FIG. 18(D)). After that, a battle develops between the protagonist and the vampire Count Dracula, and if the protagonist wins, the AT stock is guaranteed to be released, or the bonus is guaranteed to be released if the bonus is internally won.

From the normal night screen shown in Figure 19(A) (same as Figure 17(B)), scroll the display screen to the right, the graveyard will be enlarged, and the butler character will shout "Olya". With the sound effect "Tirororororon", the main character appears from the dug grave in the center of the screen (see Figure 19 (B)), and the words "BONUS", which means "Jackpot", are displayed ( (See FIG. 19(C)), it may be possible to create an extremely hot premiere performance. All of these display effects are also executed by the sub-control unit 160 outputting effect commands according to the program.

FIG. 20 is a conceptual diagram of a general lottery table.

The lottery table is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, and defines the relationship between winning combinations and numbers used for random number lottery.

In the case of the reel-type gaming machine of the present invention, the main control section 100 generates a random number value. This random value periodically generates all the values from 0 to 65535 (m7) randomly only once in one period. FIG. 20(A) is a lottery table used in the normal state (non-RT state), and when the main control unit 100 performs an internal lottery in accordance with the timing when the start lever 9 is operated, the random number is 0 to If it is within the range of m1, the big bonus (BB) will be won. That is, this internal lottery is to pick up (extract) only one random number value at a predetermined timing during the start operation, and compare it with the lottery table to determine the winning combination.

Similarly, a regular bonus (RB) if the random number is in the range of m1+1 to m2, a cherry if the random number is in the range of m2+1 to m3, a watermelon if the random number is in the range of m3+1 to m4, and a bell if the random number is in the range of m4+1 to m5. If the random number is in the range of m5+1 to m6, the replay will be a win, but if the random number is in the range of m6+1 to m7, it will be a loss.

Normally, these values m1 to m7 are set appropriately considering legal regulations (Entertainment Business Act) and game characteristics, but in the case of A type normal machine, the probability of winning BB is "1/200". The probability of winning RB is about 1/400, the probability of winning Cherry and Watermelon is about 1/50, the probability of winning Bell is about 1/6, and the probability of winning Replay is 1/7.3. It has become.

On the other hand, FIG. 20(B) is a lottery table used in the high probability replay state (RT state), and in replay time, the replay winning range widens by α, while the losing range narrows by α. As a result, the probability of winning a replay is set to about 1/2. As a result, the probability of a replay win equivalent to a three-piece payout increases significantly, while the probability of a loss decreases, resulting in a significant improvement or increase in the expected payout value of gaming medals during replay time. . Further, the main control unit 100 can set the expected value of the replay time to a desired value by increasing or decreasing this α value.

Although detailed diagrams of the lottery tables are omitted, there are six lottery tables 1, 2, and 6 corresponding to the stage setting values 1 to 6 of the ball output rate and the number of inserted medals (specified number), and the main control unit selects a lottery table according to the stage setting value and the number of inserted medals set by the stage setting section 150, and executes an internal lottery for a bonus game and a plurality of small prizes in the variable display game. Note that the expected value of winning a bonus game in the internal lottery is generally as follows: lottery table 1 < lottery table 2 <...< lottery table 6, so players chase after the high setting machine. However, if the machine is for 3 medals only, a lottery table with 1 medal to be inserted is not necessary.

FIG. 21 is a payout table showing the relationship between symbol combinations and the number of acquired medals.

BB (Big Bonus) is the name of the role when the BB symbols of "Red 7" are aligned on the active line. When these are aligned, the number of medals earned is 0, and the flag 1 is set in the corresponding flag area to receive the Big Bonus. The game (BB game: operation of the accessory continuous operation device) begins and ends with the payout of more than 360 coins.

RB (Regular Bonus) is the role name when the RB symbols of "Blue 7" are aligned on the active line. When these are aligned, the number of medals earned is 0, and the flag 1 is set in the corresponding flag area to receive the Regular Bonus. The game (RB game: operation of the accessory continuous operation device) starts and ends with the payout of more than 120 coins. Note that these accessory continuous operation devices may be either the first type special accessory or the second type special accessory, and are appropriately selected according to the design specifications.

When the cherry symbol stops on the active line of the left drum, one medal is acquired for each active line. For example, if the effective line is the display judgment diagram in Figure 14, if it stops at the middle of the left drum, there will be one (short check), but if it stops at the upper or lower stage, there will be two effective lines, and the payout will be 2 in total. It becomes a piece (Kakuche).

When the watermelon symbols line up on the active line, five medals are acquired.

When the bell symbols line up on the active line, eight medals are acquired.

When the replay symbols are aligned on the active line, a replay without medals is activated, flag 1 is set in the flag area, and the player performs a replay operation by operating the start lever 9 to lower the flag (i.e., 0). In other words, the next game can be played without inserting medals.

Next, the basic operation of the reel-type gaming machine configured as described above will be explained in detail with reference to flowcharts and the like.

First, when the drum-type game machine is shipped from the factory, the default warning mode is "on", the stop setting section 180 (stop setting switch) is "off", and the step setting value is the lowest, "1". Assume that .

On the gaming hall side, before letting a player play, when the front door of the drum-type gaming machine main body 1 is opened and the power switch 28c is turned on, power is supplied to each circuit block, and the main control unit 100 operates as described below. In step S100, initial checks (hardware abnormality check, etc.) and initial settings (for example, writing the abort setting flag "1", the stage setting value "1" stored in the ROM 101, and the initial value of the control data to the RAM 102) are performed. However, the sub-control unit 160 sets the warning mode to the "on state", and when the front door 1b is closed, the variable display game can be played.

In this game-enabled state, even if the game hall side opens the front door 1b again and operates the input SW section 25 (pressing the initialization switch and the volume switch at the same time), the sub-control section 160 will not be able to control the input switch from the main control section 100. Since the control data indicating the stage setting mode of the ball output rate has not been received, the warning mode is not changed from the "on state" to another state ("off state" or "timer state"). Therefore, there is a unique effect that the warning mode cannot be easily changed by a hacker or the like. Note that the stop setting flag "1" corresponds to the stop setting section 180 being "on", and "0" corresponds to "off".

Then, it is assumed that the game hall side is about to change the ball payout rate setting for a grand opening, a new store opening, or an event in this setting state.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the main operation processing procedure of the reel-type gaming machine.

An employee of the game hall opens the front door of the reel-type game machine main body 1, turns the power switch 28c off, inserts the setting change key into the setting key switch 28a, and turns it clockwise to turn it on (Fig. 4). When the power switch 28c is turned on again (see the enlarged view of the setting key switch), power is supplied to each circuit block, and after initial checks and initial settings are executed in step S100, the main control unit 100 turns on the power switch 28c. In S110, it is determined whether the setting key switch 28a is in the ON state.

If the setting key switch 28a is not in the ON state, the main control unit 100 moves to step S130, whereas if it is in the ON state, the main control unit 100 calls a setting change subroutine in step S120 (transfers to the setting change mode).

In the setting change mode of step S120, before the game hall allows the player to play, the game hall inputs the stage setting value "6" for the ball payout rate, hits the start lever 9 once to confirm the setting value, and presses the setting key switch 28a. When set to the OFF state, the main control unit 100 returns to step S100, sets the set value to "6", and performs necessary processing such as initial hardware check and initial setting again.

Further, when the main control unit 100 outputs control data to the sub-control unit 160 in order to perform initial screen display settings in step S100, the sub-control unit 160 displays ($Y0$01) as a production command, for example. It is transmitted to the production device 11. As a result, the display panel 11e displays, as a start screen, "Night Performance Pattern 1" consisting of a full moon in the night sky, Dracula's castle, and a graveyard (not shown).

When the main control unit 100 moves to step S130 after changing the stage setting value, it checks for the occurrence of abnormalities such as door open, hopper error, selector error, etc. If there is an abnormality, the main control unit 100 moves to step S140 and restarts after processing the abnormality. Returning to step S100, if there is no abnormality, the process moves to step S150. In particular, as an abnormality check, the main control unit 100 checks that the stage setting value data stored in the work RAM area is 0 to 5 (the stage setting values displayed on the medal payout number display LED 4c correspond to 1 to 6, respectively). ), and if the stage setting value is not within the predetermined range, the display effect device 11, speaker section 12, and gaming status display LED section 13 will issue a warning ("EE" error text display). , light emission, and warning sound) to perform error processing (abnormality processing in step S140).

When proceeding to step S150, the main control unit 100 determines whether the player has inserted the required number of gaming medals for the game using the medal detection sensor 130 or the bet button sensor 140, and if the player has inserted a predetermined number of gaming medals. If the medal has not been inserted, the process returns to step S130 and waits while looping each step until there is an operation to insert the medal.

When the main control unit 100 moves to step S160, the main control unit 100 checks whether the player operates the start lever to start the variable display game, and if it starts, the main control unit 100 moves to step S170. If not, the process returns to step S130 and waits while looping each step until there is a start operation.

The main control unit 100 executes the main processing of the variable display game in step S170, performs a random number lottery in accordance with the reception timing of the start signal, and selects the picked up (extracted) random number and the current internal state (RT or non-RT). It is determined whether or not there has been an internal winning by comparing with the lottery table of (see explanation of FIG. 20).

The main control unit 100 transmits a lottery result command and a game start signal to the sub-control unit 160, and also rotates the drum units 2 all at once to display the plural numbers displayed on the left drum 2a, middle drum 2b, and right drum 2c. A fluctuating display game is started in which the symbols of are fluctuated at a predetermined speed.

As explained in FIGS. 9 and 10, the main control unit 100 controls each symbol row (spinning band) by the player operating the left stop button 10a, middle stop button 10b, or right stop button 10c of the stop button unit 10. When stopped, pull-in control is performed to align the symbols according to the internal winning combination on the active line, and conversely, avoidance control is performed to prevent the symbols from aligning. Further, upon receiving a lottery result command and a game start signal from the main control unit 100, the sub-control unit 160 determines whether or not to display a performance on the display performance device 11, speaker unit 12, and gaming status display LED unit 13. The lottery results of jackpot (bonus win), small win, replay, or loss are notified to the players.

In each variable display game of the general game, the main control unit 100 determines that a winning combination is established if predetermined symbols are displayed in line on the effective line of the window 3, and distributes game medals according to the payout table shown in FIG. The medals are paid out from the payout device 18 and discharged from the medal payout opening 16.

In addition, in the big bonus game (BB game) in which three red 7s are arranged, the accessory continuous operation device is activated and the BB game mode is ended when the number of acquired coins exceeds 360 coins. Further, in a regular bonus game (RB game) in which three blue 7s are present, the accessory continuous operation device is activated and the RB game mode is ended when the number of acquired coins exceeds 120 coins.

After the main control unit 100 finishes the game main processing in step S170, the main control unit 100 returns to step S130 and repeats the processing in sequence.

FIG. 23 is a drum symbol arrangement table.

On each of the left drum 2a, the middle drum 2b, and the right drum 2c, a drum band (not shown) on which a left drum pattern, a middle drum pattern, and a right drum pattern are drawn is arranged so that it goes around the outer periphery of each drum. It is attached to.

Each belt has 21 symbols drawn in different arrangements, and although irregular, the symbols that trigger bonuses are "Pentagon (red)," "Pentagon (blue)," and "Pentagon (white)." , "Red 7", "Bell", "Square (red)", "Square (blue)", "Square (white)" symbols that make up various small roles, and replays of the symbols that activate replay are drawn. It is. Note that the three types of pentagonal symbols also serve as small role symbols.

FIG. 24 is a symbol combination display determination diagram.

When all three drums have stopped, the main control unit 100 determines whether to display combinations of symbols related to winnings and operations on the active line of the window unit 3 according to the number of game medals inserted (dedicated to 3 coins for general games). conduct.

FIG. 24(B) shows the effective lines when the specified number of three game medals are inserted, and the first line (upper, middle, lower: right (down), 2nd line (lower, middle, upper: upward right), 3rd line (upper, middle, upper: V-shape), and 4th line (lower, middle, lower: chevron-shaped or inverted V-shape). becomes effective. In addition, in the bonus game (RB: when the first type special accessory is activated), the prescribed number of game medals is two, but the active lines are exactly the same for the first line to the fourth line.

FIG. 25 is a payout table when the accessory is not activated (during a normal game, the specified number is 3).

When all three drums have stopped, the main control unit 100 determines the combination display of symbols related to winning or activation on the active line (see FIG. 24) according to the number of game medals inserted. In this case, the effective line is the same regardless of the number of sheets inserted (3 sheets or 2 sheets).

(1) Bonus role (RB: 1st class special role): Either (pentagon (red), pentagon (blue), pentagon (white)) on the left drum 2a, (pentagon (red), This is the role name when either ((Pentagon (red), Pentagon (blue), Pentagon (white)) stops on the active line on the right drum 2c. , the number of winning coins is 0, and then a regular bonus game is given.There are 27 types of combination symbols (3 x 3 x 3) for the bonus combination, and if a single winning combination is won internally, the stop operation order of the stop button part 10 will be changed. The symbols are arranged in such a way that the prescribed bonus symbol will stop on any one of the active lines and you will definitely win regardless of the timing or timing.In this regular bonus game, if you win 8 times in a maximum of 8 times, However, since the number of coins inserted is 2 and 2 small winnings are always won, there is no increase or decrease in the number of medals.On the other hand, if the expected value of the increase or decrease in the number of coins in the regular bonus game is 0, If the configuration is such that small winnings are missed, the number of medals will decrease as in normal times, which can be disadvantageous for the player.In the initial state (RT0 state: replay probability is approximately 1/7.3) , when the bonus combination (RB) is internally won (conditional device activated), the replay winning probability changes from the next game and becomes a high probability replay state (RT1 state: replay probability approximately 1/1.8). When the regular bonus game due to the activation of the bonus combination ends (ends the operation), the replay winning probability changes and returns to the initial state (RT0 state).In other words, the player can play in any of the RT0 state, RT1 state, and regular bonus game state. The variable display game will be played in this gaming state.This initial state will be the normal game in the normal game (see FIG. 26).

(2) Red 7 small role (FR1: 1st target small role): The name of the role when the red 7 symbol is on the left drum 2a, the bell symbol is on the middle drum 2b, and the bell symbol is on the right drum 2c and stops on the effective line. Therefore, the number of acquired coins (number of paid coins) is 15. When the Red 7 small winning combination is internally won in the lottery, one conditional device of FR1 (Fruit 1) is activated. Assuming that FR1 has one type of combination symbol and is internally won individually, the predetermined red 7 minor symbol will be on any one active line, regardless of the order and timing of the stop button section 10. The symbols are arranged in such a way that you are sure to win when you stop. As will be described later, in the RT0 state or RT1 state, the red 7 small winnings are 1 small winning left 1 to 3, 1 small winning middle 1 to 3, 1 small winning right 1 to 3 for press order control. It is possible to win at the same time as any of 3. Note that the first target small winning combination is a small winning combination that should be won, and is advantageous for the player.

(3) Bell minor role (FR2: second target minor role): This is the role name when the bell symbols are aligned on the active line, and the number of winning pieces is 2. When the Bell small prize is internally won in the lottery, one conditional device of FR2 (Fruit 2) is activated. In FR2, assuming that there is only one combination of symbols and an internal winning is achieved independently, the bell symbol will stop on any one active line and the prize will always be won, regardless of the order and timing of the stop button section 10. The designs are arranged like this. As will be described later, in the RT0 state or RT1 state, the bell small winning combination is 1-card small winning left 1-3, 1-card small winning middle 1-3, and 1-card small winning right 1-3 for pressing order control. You can win at the same time as any of the following. Note that the second target minor prize is a minor prize that should be won, and is advantageous for the player.

The one-card small winning combination for press order control is a small winning combination for drawing in the above-mentioned bonus winning combination (bonus drawing small winning combination), and in this example, there are nine types, and when the pressing order of the stop button part is correct, The winning Red 7 small winning combination (first target small winning) or Bell small winning combination (second target small winning) wins a prize, while the one winning small winning combination due to an incorrect answer or the bonus winning combination winning at the same time wins a prize. Note that if the answer is incorrect, the probability of winning the bonus combination is 2/3.

(4) 1-sheet small role left 1 (FR3): Square (brown) pattern on the left drum 2a, (
Any pattern (pentagon (red), pentagon (blue), pentagon (white))) on the right drum 2c (pentagon (red), pentagon (blue), pentagon (white)) (the pattern combination is This is the role name when all 9 types) are stopped on the active line, and the number of coins obtained is 1. When 1 piece small prize left 1 is internally won in the lottery, one condition device of FR3 (Fruit 3) is activated. Assuming that FR3 has 9 types of combination symbols and is internally won individually, if you operate the left stop button 10a at the timing when you can pull in the square (brown) symbol, the stop operation order and timing of the other stop button parts 10 will change. Regardless, the symbols are arranged so that a predetermined one symbol on the left of a small winning combination stops on any one active line and wins. Conversely, if the left stop button 10a is operated at a timing when the square (brown) symbol cannot be pulled in, the player will lose. In addition, 1 is stored as press order data which means that the first stop operation is the left stop button 10a (01 in 2-bit binary number) in association with the 1 piece small winning combination left 1. However, it is possible to use a push order discrimination program to create logic so that if there is one small winning combination left 1, the first stop operation is the left stop button 10a, but it takes a long processing time, Due to the required data capacity, press order data is generally stored.

(5) 1 piece small winning combination left 2 (FR4): 1 piece small winning combination left 1 only has the symbol on the left drum 2a changed to a square (blue) symbol, and the rest is the same, so the explanation will be omitted.

(6) 1 piece small winning combination left 3 (FR5): 1 piece small winning combination left 1 only has the symbol on the left drum 2a changed to a square (white) symbol, and the rest is the same, so the explanation will be omitted.

(7) 1 piece small role 1 (FR6): Any symbol (pentagon (red), pentagon (blue), pentagon (white)) on the left drum 2a, square (brown) symbol on the middle drum 2b, right This is the role name when any of the symbols (pentagon (red), pentagon (blue), pentagon (white)) (9 types of symbol combinations) are aligned on the active line and stopped on drum 2c, and the number of pieces obtained is 1. It becomes one piece. When 1 out of 1 small winnings is internally won in the lottery, one conditional device of FR6 (Fruit 6) is activated. Assuming that FR6 has 9 types of combination symbols and is internally won individually, if you operate the middle stop button 10b at the timing when you can draw the square (brown) symbol, the stop operation order and timing of the other stop button parts 10 will change. Regardless, the symbols are arranged so that one symbol in a predetermined one small winning combination stops on any one active line and wins a prize. Conversely, if the middle stop button 10b is operated at a timing when the square (brown) symbol cannot be pulled in, the player will lose. As described above, in association with 1 in 1 small winning combination, 2 is stored as press order data indicating that the first stop operation is the middle stop button 10b (10 in 2-bit binary).

(8) 1-card small winning combination 2 (FR7): 1-card small winning combination 1 is only that the symbol on the middle drum 2b has been changed to a square (blue) symbol, and the rest is the same, so the explanation will be omitted.

(9) 3 in 1 small winning combination (FR8): 1 in 1 small winning combination only means that the symbol on the middle drum 2b has been changed to a square (white) symbol, and the rest is the same, so the explanation will be omitted.

(10) 1 piece small role right 1 (FR9): Any symbol (pentagon (red), pentagon (blue), pentagon (white)) on the left drum 2a, (pentagon (red), pentagon) on the middle drum 2b (blue), pentagon (white)) symbol, or a square (brown) symbol on the right drum 2c (9 types of symbol combinations) are aligned on the active line and stop, and the number of pieces obtained is 1. It becomes one piece. When one small prize right 1 is internally won in the lottery, one conditional device of FR9 (Fruit 9) is activated. Assuming that FR9 has 9 types of combination symbols and is internally won individually, if you operate the right stop button 10c at the timing when you can draw the square (brown) symbol, the stop operation order and timing of the other stop button parts 10 will change. Regardless, the symbols are arranged so that one symbol in a predetermined one small winning combination stops on any one active line and wins a prize. Conversely, if the right stop button 10c is operated at a timing when the square (brown) symbol cannot be pulled in, the player will lose. As mentioned above, 1 piece small role right 1
In association with this, 3 is stored as push order data indicating that the first stop operation is the right stop button 10c (11 in 2-bit binary).

(11) 1 piece small winning right 2 (FR10): 1 piece small winning right 1 only has the symbol on the right drum 2c changed to a square (blue) symbol, and the rest is the same, so the explanation will be omitted.

(12) 1 piece small winning combination right 3 (FR11): 1 piece small winning combination right 1 only has the symbol on the right drum 2c changed to a square (white) symbol, and the rest is the same, so the explanation will be omitted.

(13) Replay (replay): This is the role name when three replay symbols are aligned on the active line, and no medals are obtained for this, but if the RP flag is set in the flag area and this is won alone, Or, even if you win at the same time as other small winnings or bonus winnings, replay will always be activated. In the replay, there is only one type of combination of symbols, and by operating the start lever 9 by the player, the next game can be played without inserting medals. Note that even if replay is activated, it does not trigger a change in RT (replay winning probability).

This example explains the basic configuration, and includes not only the winning combinations mentioned above, but also rare small combinations such as cherry and watermelon, other special replay combinations, and the red 7 replay combination that is won only during the bonus game. It is also possible to provide a replay combination in which the red 7 symbols appear to be aligned on the upper horizontal line, middle horizontal line, or lower horizontal line, which are invalid lines. When these rare small winning combinations are internally won, an ART lottery is held, or when the Red 7 replay winning combination is internally won, an ART is confirmed, and multiple sets of ARTs are awarded by lottery.

FIG. 26 is a conceptual diagram showing a game state transition diagram and lottery probabilities of various winning combinations. FIG. 26(B) shows the lottery probability during normal gaming, FIG. 26(C) shows the lottery probability within the RB, and FIG. 26(D) shows the lottery probability within the RB.

In FIG. 26(A), the general game (described as "general game" in the figure) starts from the next game after the regular bonus game (RB game) has ended or the next game for which the stage setting value has been reset. . The replay probability (probability of winning a replay) in this general game is approximately 1/7.3.

When RB, which is a bonus combination, is internally won and RB wins in that game, the RB game starts from the next game. The RB game ends after 8 games or 8 wins, and from the next game onwards, a normal replay state in which the probability of winning a replay combination is low is entered. When the player is addicted to the game, the sequence repeats the normal game (medals decrease in the normal replay state) -> RB internally won -> RB won -> 8 RB games -> RB game finished -> normal game.

On the other hand, even if RB is won internally in the general game, if the winning of RB is avoided, an RT state is entered in which the bonus combination is internally won (RB internally) (see the shaded area in FIG. 26(A)). In this RT state, there is no loss (non-winning) as will be described later, so the player can play the variable display game in an advantageous gaming state.

During normal gaming (see FIG. 26(B)), the number of RBs placed is 12,000, and the winning probability is 12,000/65,536. The number of winnings for RB, Bell small role, and 1-card small role at the same time is 6000, and the probability of winning is 6000/65536. The number of places where the red 7 small winning combination and the 1-card small winning combination can be won at the same time is 23000, and the winning probability is 23000/65536. The number of replays is 8978, and the probability of winning is 8978/65536 (1/7.3). On the other hand, the probability of not winning (losing) is 15558/65536 (1/4.2).

Inside the RB (see FIG. 26(C)), no RB lottery is performed, so the probability of winning is 0. Note that RB is in a state where the RB flag is set and the RB is already hit. This RB is in a high-probability replay state (RT state) in which the replay winning probability fluctuates. The lottery area with the RB number 12,000 and the non-winning number 15,558 shown in FIG. 26(B) becomes the new replay winning area. Therefore, the original replay number 8978, the number 12000, and the number 15558 added to the number 36536 become the number 36536, and the probability of winning the replay is 36536/65536 (approximately 1/1.8), and the probability of not winning is 0. becomes. That is, by activating the AT function in the RB where there is no loss and notifying the push order for winning the Red 7 minor winning combination and the Bell minor winning combination, the player can efficiently obtain medals.

Calculating the expected value within RB, the probability of winning the Red 7 small combination is 23000/65536, and the increased number of coins is 12 (15 paid out - 3 put in), so it is 4.2 coins/game. Become. On the other hand, the probability of winning the small Bell combination is 6000/65536, and the increase in the number of coins is -1 (2 coins paid out - 3 coins put in), so it is -0.09 coins/game. Even if you win a replay, you can play the next game without inserting medals, so there is no change in the expected value. Therefore, if AT is activated inside the RB and wins the Red 7 small role and the Bell small role, the average number of coins will increase by about 4.1 coins/game, which is the highest net increase in the number of coins in the No. 5 machine. can be achieved.

In RB (see FIG. 26(D)), the number of Bell small winning combinations is 65536, and the winning probability is 100%. Since there are 2 medals paid out and 2 medals inserted, there is no increase or decrease in the number of medals during this period. However, if multiple types of small winning combinations are drawn and the winnings are selected in the order in which they are pressed, the expected value of the number of winnings can be intentionally lowered.

FIG. 27 is a conceptual diagram showing a simultaneous winning state of combinations.

FIG. 27(A) shows a state in which RB, a small bell prize (FR2), and a small prize of one card (FR3) are won at the same time during normal gaming (see FIG. 26(B)). Since the push order data for the 1-card small winning combination (FR3) is 1, the left stop button 10a is the correct operation order.

FIG. 27(B) shows a state in which the red 7 small winning combination (FR1) and the 1 piece small winning combination (FR7) are won at the same time during the normal game (see FIG. 26(B)). Since the push order data for the 1-card small winning combination (FR7) is 2, the correct operation order is the middle stop button 10b.

FIG. 27(C) shows a state in which the red 7 small winning combination (FR1) and the 1-card small winning combination (FR11) are simultaneously won within the RB (see FIG. 26(C)). Naturally, the RB flag is set inside the RB, and the RB is also in a winning state even without a lottery. Since the push order data for the one-card small winning combination (FR11) is 3, the right stop button 10c is the correct operation order.

FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window section in chronological order.

For example, in a general game, if the RB, Bell small winning combination (FR2), and 1 piece small winning combination (FR3) shown in FIGS. 26(B) and 27(A) are won at the same time by random number lottery, the RB flag, FR2 flag and the FR3 flag is set.

When the player operates the left stop button 10a at the first stop while all the drums of the drum unit 2 are rotating, the main control unit 100 controls the control information to be stored (i.e., when the player operates the left stop button 10a at the first left stop) ) is determined to have matched (the pressing order was "correct"), so regardless of the order of the second and third stop operations, the stop control process ensures that only the small winning combination of Bell wins and 2 pieces. pay out medals. That is, the main control unit 100 starts a variable display game in which the three symbol rows are varied, and determines the RB, the bell minor prize (second target minor prize), and the push order by lottery of the winning combination (also referred to as "symbol lottery"). One small winning combination (9 types of symbol combinations), which is a small winning combination, is internally won at the same time. When the stop button section 10 is operated in the pressing order (left first) stored corresponding to this one-piece small winning combination, the bell symbol is stopped on the active line and the bell small winning combination is won. In addition, as will be described later, if the pressing order is correct, stop control is performed so that neither the RB nor the one-piece small winning combination that is internally won at the same time is won.

FIG. 28(A) shows a state in which all the drums of the drum section 2 are rotating. In this state, the player presses the left stop button 10a at the first stop. When the stop operation is performed when the red 7 of No. 9 is at the reference position (the state where the red 7 of No. 9 can be immediately stopped at the lower position of the left drum 2a, see FIG. 28(B)), the main control unit 100 stops the red 7 of the effective line Pull-in control is performed so that only one bell symbol stops on either side. In this case, No. 4 frames above. 5 is stopped at the lower position of the left drum 2a (see FIG. 28(C)). As a result, the left drum 2a slides four frames and stops. The main control unit 100 can also stop the rectangular (brown) symbols of the simultaneously winning one-piece small winning combination (FR3) on the active line, but it is also possible to stop the square (brown) symbols of the one-piece small winning combination (FR3) on the active line, but it is possible to stop the square (brown) symbols of the one-piece small winning combination (FR3) that are winning at the same time, but it is possible to stop the square (brown) symbols of the simultaneous winning one-piece small winning combination (FR3) on the active line. This causes the bell pattern to stop. However, the main control unit 100 is configured to perform stop control so that the minor winning symbols are prioritized over the bonus winning symbols when any of the symbols can be drawn in regarding the bonus winning symbol and the minor winning symbol.

FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window section in chronological order.

FIG. 29(A) is the same as FIG. 28(C), and when the left drum 2a is stopped and the bell symbol is displayed in the lower row, when the player operates the middle stop button 10b at the second stop. , the main control unit 100 is, for example, No. 8 is stopped at the middle stage of the middle drum 2b (see FIG. 29(B)). In addition, since the five bell symbols on the middle drum 2b are arranged at 4-frame intervals at the farthest distance, any bell symbol in the retraction range can be stopped at the middle stage of the middle drum 2b to enter the tenpai state. is possible. Furthermore, the ten-pai state shown in FIG. 29(B) is also referred to as a "ready-to-reach state" of a predetermined combination as a synonym.

In the tenpai state of FIG. 29(B), when the player operates the right stop button 10c at the third stop, the main control unit 100, for example, 7 is stopped at the upper stage of the right drum 2c (see FIG. 29(C)). Furthermore, since the six bell symbols on the right drum 2c are arranged at intervals of four frames or less, it is possible to win a prize by stopping any of the bell symbols on the upper or lower row of the right drum 2c. (Line 2 in the diagram). If it stops on the upper stage, it will be a strong bell and an AT lottery will be performed with a high probability.

FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window portion in chronological order.

FIG. 30(A) is the same as FIG. 29(A), and when the player operates the right stop button 10c at the second stop with the left drum 2a stopped and the bell symbol displayed in the lower row. , similarly to FIG. 29(C), the main control unit 100 7 is stopped at the upper stage of the right drum 2c (see FIG. 30(B)). Furthermore, since the six bell symbols on the right drum 2c are arranged at intervals of four frames or less, any bell symbol in the pull-in range can be stopped on the upper or lower stage of the right drum 2c to enter the tenpai state. is possible.

In the tenpai state of FIG. 30(B), when the player operates the middle stop button 10b at the third stop, the main control unit 100, for example, stops the middle stop button 10b. 8 is stopped at the middle stage of the middle drum 2b (see FIG. 30(C)). Furthermore, since the five bell symbols on the middle drum 2b are arranged at 4-frame intervals at the furthest distance, it is possible to win a prize by stopping any bell symbol within the pull-in range in the middle row of the middle drum 2b. (second line in the figure). In other words, if any of the RB, Bell small winnings, and left first 1-card small winnings (FR3 to FR5) are won at the same time, if the first pressing order is the left stop button 10a, no matter how you operate after that, While the Bell small role wins, the RB or 1-card small role does not win. As a result, in the next and subsequent games, the player enters a high probability replay state (RT state) during which the RB internally wins, so the player can play without losing. In the AT state, the sub-control unit 160 uses the display production device 11 and the speaker unit 12 to notify a predetermined first order (in this case, left first) for winning the bell small winning combination.

FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window portion in chronological order.

Similar to FIG. 28(A), FIG. 31(A) shows a state in which all the drums of the drum section 2 are rotating. In this state, the player presses the middle stop button 10b at the first stop, for example, at No. If the stop operation is performed when the No. 1 pentagon (red) is at the reference position (a state in which the No. 1 pentagon (red) can be stopped immediately at the lower position of the middle drum 2b, see FIG. 31(B)), the main control unit 100 is at the middle position of the middle drum 2b where the effective line passes, and No. 5 frames above. The 17 pentagonal (white) symbols are stopped (see Figure 31(C)). As a result, the middle drum 2b slides four frames and stops. Note that the main control unit 100 can also stop the bell symbol (No. 19) of the simultaneously winning bell minor role (FR2) on the active line, but if the push order data is 1, it is possible to stop the bell symbol (No. This means that the pressing order is wrong, so the pentagon (white) symbol of the 1 small winning combination (FR3) that is within the pull-in number range is stopped on the active line. In addition, no matter what timing the player operates the middle drum 2b at the first stop, the pentagon (red) symbols constituting the one-piece small winning combination (FR3), which are arranged at four-frame intervals at the farthest point, and the pentagon Either one of the (blue) symbol or the pentagon (white) symbol can be stopped at the middle position. However, the reason why the main control unit 100 does not draw in the bell pattern is that when one small role pattern is drawn, the number of pattern combinations is 3 (square (brown), pentagon (white), pentagon (red/blue/white)). ), on the other hand, the number of symbol combinations when the Bell minor symbol is drawn is 1, and in both cases, the number of symbol combinations is greater in the 1-card minor symbol (FR3) than in the Bell minor symbol. be. That is, if the pressing order of the first stop is incorrect, the symbols constituting the one-card small winning combination (FR3) can be drawn onto the active line and stopped. And, since this single small winning symbol also serves as the RB symbol, it results in drawing in the symbols of both winning hands.

FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window portion in chronological order.

FIG. 32(A) is the same as FIG. 31(C), and when the player operates the right stop button 10c at the second stop with the middle drum 2b stopped and the replay symbol displayed in the lower row. , the main control unit 100 is, for example, No. The pentagonal (red) pattern No. 3 is stopped at the lower stage of the right drum 2c (see FIG. 32(B)). In addition, the pentagon (red) symbol, pentagon (blue) symbol, or pentagon (white) symbol that constitutes the one-piece small winning combination (FR3) is arranged at 6-frame intervals on the right drum 2c, so it is within the pull-in range. It is possible to place any of the pentagonal (red/blue/white) symbols on the upper or lower stage of the right drum 2c to create a tenpai state. In this case, not only the one-card small winning combination (FR3) but also the RB winning state become tenpai state (double tenpai state).

In the double tenpai state shown in FIG. 32(B), the player presses the left stop button 10a at the third stop. When the stop operation is performed when the bell symbol No. 5 is at the reference position, the main control unit 100 moves to the No. 5 bell symbol located one frame above. The 4 square (brown) symbol is stopped at the lower position of the left drum 2a, and the 1-piece small winning combination (FR3) is won on the 4th line (see FIG. 32(C)). In addition, No. 10 throwaway symbols ~No. When the left stop button 10a is operated to stop when the square (brown) pattern No. 4 is at the reference position, No. By stopping the 4 square (brown) symbol on the first line or the fourth line, it is possible to win a small winning combination (FR3) of one piece. In other words, the winning probability is 1/3 because it is only necessary to perform a stop operation within the range of 7 out of 21 frames. As a result, in the next and subsequent games, the player enters a high probability replay state (RT state) during which the RB internally wins, so the player can play without losing.

FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window portion in chronological order.

FIG. 33(A) is the same double tenpai state as FIG. 32(B), and the player presses the left stop button 10a at the third stop. If the stop operation is performed when the discard symbol No. 3 is at the standard position, the main control unit 100 will move the discard symbol No. 3 located two frames above. The pentagonal (red) symbol No. 1 is stopped at the lower position of the left drum 2a, and the RB combination is won on the fourth line (see FIG. 33(B)).

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 33(A), the player presses the left stop button 10a at the third stop. If the stop operation is performed when the No. 11 square (blue) is at the reference position, the main control unit 100 will move the No. 11 square (blue) located three frames above. The 8 pentagonal (blue) symbol is stopped at the lower position of the left drum 2a, and the RB combination is won on the 4th line (see FIG. 33(C)). In other words, No. 1~No. 3 or no. 11～No. When the player operates the left stop button 10a to stop when any of the 21 symbols is at the reference position, the RB symbol stops on the first line or the fourth line and the RB combination is won. In other words, if the stop operation is performed within the range of 14 out of 21 frames, the RB combination will win, and the winning probability is 2/3. As a result, the next game will be a bonus game, and the player will play the game without increasing the number of medals. It should be noted that even if the left stop button 10a is operated at the second stop, the prize winning mode will be the same as a result, so the explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window section in chronological order.

For example, during a general game, if the red 7 small winning combination (FR1) and the 1 piece small winning combination (FR7) shown in FIGS. 26(B) and 27(B) are won at the same time by random number lottery, the FR1 flag and the FR7 flag are stand.

When the player operates the intermediate stop button 10b at the first stop while all the drums of the drum unit 2 are rotating, the main control unit 100 controls the control information to be stored (i.e., when the player presses the intermediate stop button 10b at the first intermediate stop). ) is determined to have matched (the press order was "correct"), so regardless of the order of the second and third stop operations, the stop control process ensures that only the red 7 small winning combination wins. Pay out 1 medal. That is, the main control unit 100 starts a variable display game in which the three symbol rows are varied, and selects a red 7 small winning combination (first target small winning) and a 1 piece small winning combination (the first target small winning) and a 1 piece small winning combination (the first target small winning) by lottery of the winning combinations. Nine types of symbol combinations are selected internally at the same time. When the stop button section 10 is operated in the pressing order (medium first) stored corresponding to this one-card small winning combination, the bell symbol is stopped on the active line and the red 7 small winning combination is won. Furthermore, as will be described later, if the pressing order is correct, stop control is performed so as not to allow the internally won one-piece small winning combination to be won at the same time.

FIG. 34(A) shows a state in which all the drums of the drum section 2 are rotating. In this state, the player presses the middle stop button 10b at the first stop. When the stop operation is performed when the No. 8 bell pattern is at the reference position (a state in which the No. 7 pentagon (blue) pattern can be immediately stopped at the middle position of the middle drum 2b, see FIG. 34(B)), the main control unit 100 Pull-in control is performed so that the bell symbol stops on the active line. In this case, No. 5 frames above. 3 is stopped at the middle position of the middle drum 2b (see FIG. 34(C)). As a result, the middle drum 2b slides four frames and stops. In this case, the main control unit 100 cannot stop it on the active line because the rectangular (blue) symbol of the simultaneously won small winning combination (FR7) is not within the pull-in range.

FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window section in chronological order.

FIG. 35(A) is the same as FIG. 34(C), and when the player operates the right stop button 10c at the second stop with the middle drum 2b stopped and the bell symbol displayed in the middle row. , the main control unit 100 is, for example, No. The bell symbol No. 11 is stopped at the upper stage of the right drum 2c (see FIG. 35(B)). In addition, the six bell symbols on the right drum 2c are arranged at three-frame intervals at the farthest distance, so any bell symbol in the retraction range can be stopped at the upper or lower stage of the right drum 2c to reach the tenpai state. It is possible to do so.

In the tenpai state of FIG. 35(B), when the player operates the left stop button 10a at the third stop, the main control unit 100, for example, stops the left stop button 10a. The red 7 symbol of 2 is stopped at the lower stage of the left drum 2a (see FIG. 35(C)). The three red 7 symbols on the left drum 2a are arranged at 6-frame intervals, so stop any of the red 7 symbols on the upper or lower row of the left drum 2a to win the red 7 small winning combination (FR1). (second line in the figure). In addition, even if you operate the left stop button 10a at the second stop → the right stop button 10c at the third stop, the red 7 small winning combination (FR1) will be won in the same way, and the winning pattern will be the same as a result. The explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window portion in chronological order.

Similar to FIG. 34(A), FIG. 36(A) shows a state in which all the drums of the drum section 2 are rotating. In this state, the player presses the left stop button 10a at the first stop, for example No. If the stop operation is performed when the No. 7 replay symbol is at the reference position (a state in which the No. 7 replay symbol can be immediately stopped at the lower position of the left drum 2a, see FIG. 36(B)), the main control unit 100 will control the effective line. At the upper position of the left drum 2a passing through, No. 6 frames above. The pentagon (red) pattern No. 1 is stopped (see Fig. 36(C)). As a result, the left drum 2a slides four frames and stops. Note that the main control unit 100 can also stop the red 7 symbol (No. 2) of the red 7 small winning combination (FR1) that has been won at the same time on the active line, but if the push order data is 2 and the red 7 symbol (No. Since it means first and the pressing order is wrong, the pentagon (red) symbol of the 1-card small winning combination (FR7) that is within the draw-in number range is stopped on the active line. Also, no matter what timing the player operates the left drum 2a to stop at the first stop, the pentagonal (red) symbols constituting the one-piece small winning combination (FR7) arranged at 6-frame intervals at the farthest point, Either one of the pentagonal (blue) symbols or the pentagonal (white) symbols can be stopped at the upper or lower position. However, the reason why the main control unit 100 does not draw in the red 7 symbol is that the number of symbol combinations when one small role symbol is drawn is 3 (pentagon (red), square (blue), pentagon (red/blue/white). )) On the other hand, when the Red 7 small role symbol is drawn, the number of symbol combinations is 1, and in both cases, the number of symbol combinations is higher for the 1-card small role (FR7) than for the Red 7 minor role. This is because there are many. That is, if the pressing order of the first stop is incorrect, the symbols constituting the one-card small winning combination (FR7) can be drawn onto the active line and stopped. Note that this single small winning symbol also serves as the RB symbol, so if the RB is internally elected, the symbols of both symbols will be drawn in as a result.

FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window portion in chronological order.

FIG. 37(A) is the same as FIG. 36(C), in which the player presses the right stop button 10c at the second stop when the left drum 2a is stopped and the pentagon (red) symbol is displayed on the upper row. When the stop operation is performed, the main control unit 100, for example, The pentagonal (red) pattern No. 3 is stopped at the lower stage of the right drum 2c (see FIG. 37(B)). In addition, the pentagon (red) symbol, pentagon (blue) symbol, or pentagon (white) symbol that constitutes the one-sheet small winning combination (FR7) are arranged at 6-frame intervals on the right drum 2c, so they are within the pull-in range. It is possible to place any of the pentagonal (red/blue/white) symbols on the upper or lower stage of the right drum 2c to create a tenpai state. Note that the single small winning symbol that has become a tenpai state also serves as an RB symbol, so if the RB is internally elected, the result is a double tenpai state that draws symbols from both roles.

In the ten-pai state of the one-card small winning combination (FR7) shown in FIG. 37(B), the player presses the middle stop button 10b at the third stop. If the stop operation is performed when the No. 16 square (white) symbol is at the reference position, the main control unit 100 will move the No. 16 symbol 5 frames above. The 11 rectangular (blue) symbols are stopped at the middle position of the middle drum 2b, and a 1-piece small winning combination (FR7) is won on the first line (see FIG. 37(C)). In addition, No. 16 square (white) designs ~No. When the middle stop button 10b is operated to stop when the square (blue) pattern No. 11 is at the reference position, No. 10 or no. By stopping the 11 square (blue) symbols on the first line, it is possible to win a small winning combination (FR7) of one piece. In other words, the probability of winning is 3/7 because it is only necessary to perform the stop operation within the range of 6 out of 21 frames, but if the operation is performed at any other timing, you will lose. Furthermore, even if you operate the middle stop button 10b at the second stop and the right stop button 10c at the third stop, you will either win a small winning combination (FR7) or lose, and the winning pattern will be the same as a result. Therefore, the explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window portion in chronological order.

In the game inside the RB shown in FIG. 26(C), the RB flag is set, and in the inside of the RB, for example, the red 7 small winning combination (FR1) shown in FIG. 27(B) and one When the small winning combination (FR11) is won at the same time, the FR1 flag and the FR11 flag are set. Therefore, as an internal state, the RB flag, FR1 flag, and FR11 flag are set as a result (see FIG. 26(C) and FIG. 27(C)).

When the player operates the right stop button 10c at the first stop while all the drums of the drum unit 2 are rotating, the main control unit 100 stores control information (i.e., when the player presses the right stop button 10c at the first right stop) ) is determined to have matched (the press order was "correct"), so regardless of the order of the second and third stop operations, the stop control process ensures that only the red 7 small winning combination wins. Pay out 1 medal. That is, the main control unit 100 starts a variable display game in which the three symbol rows are varied, and selects RB, Red 7 minor winning combination (first target minor winning), and the pressing order by lottery of the winning combination (also referred to as "symbol lottery"). A one-card small winning combination (9 types of symbol combinations), which is a stipulated small winning combination, is simultaneously won internally. When the stop button section 10 is operated in the pressing order (right first) stored corresponding to this one-card small winning combination, the bell symbols that make up the red 7 small winning combination are stopped on the activated line, and the red 7 small winning combination is created. Let them win. In addition, as will be described later, if the pressing order is correct, stop control is performed so that neither the RB nor the one-piece small winning combination that is internally won at the same time is won.

FIG. 38(A) shows a state in which all the drums of the drum section 2 are rotating. In this state, the player presses the right stop button 10c at the first stop. When the stop operation is performed when the No. 4 bell symbol is at the reference position (the state in which the No. 4 bell symbol can be immediately stopped at the lower position of the right drum 2c, see FIG. 38(B)), the main control unit 100 controls the effective line. Pull-in control is performed so that only one bell symbol stops on either side. In this case, No. 4 frames above. 21 is stopped at the lower position of the right drum 2c (see FIG. 38(C)). It is also possible to stop the bell symbol on the upper or lower stage of the effective line with a bit stop or two frames sliding, but since it is a particularly strong "sliding red 7 small winning", as a result, the right drum 2c , the player will slide four frames and stop, and the player who sees this will expect to win the ART. Similarly, there is also a "slipping one-card small hand" that is a strong hand. The main control unit 100 can also stop the rectangular (white) symbol of the simultaneously winning one-piece small winning combination (FR11) at the upper position on the active line, but the The bell symbols that make up the winning combination are made to stop on the active line. However, the main control unit 100 is configured to perform stop control so that the minor winning symbols are prioritized over the bonus winning symbols when any of the symbols can be drawn in regarding the bonus winning symbol and the minor winning symbol.

FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window portion in chronological order.

FIG. 39(A) is the same as FIG. 38(C), and when the player operates the middle stop button 10b at the second stop with the right drum 2c stopped and the bell symbol displayed in the lower row. , the main control unit 100 is, for example, No. 8 is stopped at the middle stage of the middle drum 2b (see FIG. 39(B)). Furthermore, since the five bell symbols on the middle drum 2b are arranged at 4-frame intervals at the farthest point, any bell symbol within the pull-in range will be stopped at the middle stage of the middle drum 2b, no matter what timing the stop operation is performed. It is possible to bring the body into a state of tension.

In the tense state of FIG. 39(B), when the player operates the left stop button 10a at the third stop, the main control unit 100, for example, The red 7 symbol of 2 is stopped at the upper stage of the left drum 2a (see FIG. 39(C)). In addition, since the three red 7 symbols on the left drum 2a are arranged at 6-frame intervals, it is possible to win by stopping any of the red 7 symbols on the upper or lower row of the left drum 2a ( Line 1 in the figure). If you aim for the red 7 symbol on the upper row and it ends up being a bit, it will be the strongest red 7 small role, and an AT lottery will be held with a high probability (for example, a winning rate of 50%). On the other hand, in the case of a weak Red 7 small combination, the Red 7 symbol slides and stops at the lower position. Therefore, if the pressing order is correct, the RB internal winning state is maintained, so the player can play the game without losing.

FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window portion in chronological order.

Similar to FIG. 38(A), FIG. 40(A) shows a state in which all the drums of the drum section 2 are rotating. In this state, the player presses the left stop button 10a at the first stop, for example No. If the stop operation is performed when the replay symbol No. 7 is at the reference position (a state in which the replay symbol No. 7 can immediately stop at the lower position of the left drum 2a, see FIG. 40(B)), the main control unit 100 will control the effective line. At the upper position of the left drum 2a passing through, No. 6 frames above. The pentagon (red) pattern No. 1 is stopped (see Fig. 40(C)). As a result, the left drum 2a slides four frames and stops. Note that the main control unit 100 can also stop the red 7 symbol (No. 2) of the red 7 small winning combination (FR1) that has been won at the same time on the active line, but if the push order data is 3 and the right Since it means first and the pressing order is wrong, the pentagon (red) symbol of the 1-card small winning combination (FR11) that is within the pull-in number range is stopped on the active line. Also, no matter what timing the player stops the left drum 2a at the first stop, the pentagon (red) symbols and pentagons (blue ) symbol or pentagonal (white) symbol can be stopped at the upper or lower position. However, the reason why the main control unit 100 does not draw in the red 7 symbol is that the number of symbol combinations when one small role symbol is drawn is 3 (pentagon (red), pentagon (red/blue/white), square (white). )) On the other hand, when the Red 7 small role symbol is drawn, the number of combinations of symbols is 1 (Red 7, Bell, Bell), and in any case, the 1 piece small role (FR11) is better than the Red 7 small role. This is because there are more combinations of symbols than roles. That is, if the pressing order of the first stop is incorrect, any one of the symbols constituting the one-card small winning combination (FR11) can be drawn onto the active line and stopped. Note that this single small winning symbol also serves as the RB symbol, so if the RB is internally elected, the symbols of both symbols will be drawn in as a result.

FIG. 41 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window portion in chronological order.

FIG. 41(A) is the same as FIG. 40(C), in which the player presses the middle stop button 10b at the second stop when the left drum 2a is stopped and the pentagon (red) symbol is displayed in the upper row. , for example, No. If the stop operation is performed when the No. 1 pentagon (red) pattern is at the reference position (a state in which the No. 1 pentagon (red) pattern can be immediately stopped at the lower position of the middle drum 2b, see Fig. 41 (B)), the main control Section 100 is No. The 17 pentagonal (white) symbols are stopped at the middle stage of the middle drum 2b (see FIG. 41(C)). In addition, the pentagonal (red) symbols, pentagonal (blue) symbols, or pentagonal (white) symbols that make up the one-piece small winning combination (FR11) are arranged within 4 frame intervals on the middle drum 2b, so they are within the pull-in range. It is possible to make a certain pentagonal (red/blue/white) symbol stop at the middle stage of the middle drum 2b to be in a tenpai state. Note that the single small winning symbol that has become a tenpai state also serves as an RB symbol, and since RB has been internally won, the result is a double tenpai state in which symbols from both roles are drawn.

FIG. 42 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window portion in chronological order.

FIG. 42(A) is the same as FIG. 41(C), and the left drum 2a is stopped and a pentagonal (red) pattern is displayed on the top row, and the middle drum 2b is stopped and a pentagonal (white) pattern is displayed on the middle row. In this state, the player presses the right stop button 10c at the third stop, for example, at No. If the stop operation is performed when the No. 5 replay symbol is at the reference position (a state in which the No. 5 replay symbol can be immediately stopped at the lower position of the right drum 2c, see FIG. 42(B)), the main control unit 100 will stop the No. 5 replay symbol at the reference position. The 20 rectangular (white) symbols are stopped on the upper stage of the right drum 2c, and a 1-piece small winning combination (FR11) is won on the third line (see FIG. 42(C)). In addition, No. 5 replay pattern ~No. When the right stop button 10c is operated to stop when the square (white) pattern No. 20 is at the reference position, No. By stopping 20 square (white) symbols on the first line or the third line, it is possible to win a small winning combination (FR11) of one piece. In other words, if the stop operation is performed within the range of 7 out of 21 frames, a 1-card small winning combination (FR11) will be won, so the winning probability is 1/3, but if the operation is performed at any other timing, as will be explained later. RB wins the prize. In addition, even if you operate the right stop button 10c at the second stop → the middle stop button 10b at the third stop, a 1-piece small winning combination (FR7) or RB will be won in the same way, and the winning mode will be as follows. Since it is the same, the explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 43 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window portion in chronological order.

FIG. 43(A) is the same as FIG. 42(A), and the left drum 2a is stopped and a pentagonal (red) pattern is displayed in the upper row, and the middle drum 2b is stopped and a pentagonal (white) pattern is displayed in the middle row. In this state, the player presses the right stop button 10c at the third stop, for example, at No. If the stop operation is performed when the No. 7 bell pattern is at the reference position (the state in which the No. 7 bell pattern can be immediately stopped at the lower position of the right drum 2c), the main control unit 100 will stop the No. 7 bell pattern at the reference position. The pentagon (red) symbol 3 is slid 4 frames and stopped at the lower stage of the right drum 2c, and RB is placed on the first line (see FIG. 43(B)). Further, in the state shown in FIG. 43(A), the player presses the right stop button 10c at the third stop, for example, when the player presses the right stop button 10c. If the stop operation is performed when the No. 16 red 7 symbol is at the reference position (the state in which the No. 16 red 7 symbol can be immediately stopped at the lower position of the right drum 2c), the main control unit 100 will stop the No. 16 red 7 symbol at the reference position. 10 pentagonal (blue) symbols are slid 4 frames and stopped on the upper stage of the right drum 2c, and RB is placed on the third line (see FIG. 43(C)). In other words, if the order of operation of the stop button part 10 is wrong, there is a probability of 1/3 that one small winning combination will be won and the RB internal winning state will be maintained, but there is a probability of 2/3 that RB will be won and the RB game will be stopped. When the game starts and ends, the game returns to the regular game and becomes an addictive state where there is a chance of losing. In other words, if the Red 7 small winning combination (FR1), the Bell small winning combination (FR2), and the 1-card small winning combination (FR3 to FR11) are won while RB is internally winning, in the next game's variable display game, the RB internally winning winnings will be won. Since the player enters a high probability replay state (RT state), the player can play the game without losing.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the symbol stop processing subroutine. A solid line indicates a process executed by the main control unit 100, and a broken line indicates a process executed by the sub control unit 160.

In the main game process of step S170 in FIG. 22, the main control unit 100 executes a random number lottery (a role lottery or a symbol lottery) in accordance with the player's operation of the start lever 9 (start signal reception timing). After calling the subroutine, the symbol variation display game is started by rotating the drum section 2.

The main control unit 100 outputs a notification signal (command, data, etc.) in step S200, and transmits the lottery results and internal status (bonus flag, normal replay state or RT state, number of games played after the bonus, etc.) to the sub control unit 160. The process then proceeds to step S210, which will be described later.

Upon receiving the notification signal, the sub-control unit 160 determines whether any of the composite small winning combinations (see FIGS. 25, 26(B), and 26(C)) has been won based on commands, data, etc. in step SS100. is confirmed, and if the winning combination has not been won, a performance corresponding to another winning combination is performed and the process ends, whereas if the winning combination has been won, the process moves to step SS110.

In step SS110, the sub-control unit 160 checks whether the AT is in progress and there is a remaining number of games. If there is no remaining game, the process proceeds to step SS120, while if there is AT stock, the process proceeds to step SS130.

The sub-control unit 160 checks in step SS120 whether there is an AT stock or not and whether the conditions for discharging (activating the AT function) are satisfied, and if the conditions are not satisfied, the process ends, and if the conditions are satisfied, the process proceeds to step SS130. Move to.

The sub-control unit 160 activates the AT function in step SS130, announces the pressing order of the stop button operations corresponding to the internally won composite minor winning combination, and ends this process. Specifically, this AT function works with a male voice saying "left," "center," and "right," and a female voice saying "left," "center," and "right." , and display it as an image on the display presentation device 11.

When the main control unit 100 moves to step S210, if the internally won one is a composite minor winning combination, and the stop operation is performed in the pressing order corresponding to the composite minor winning combination (that is, even if the pressing order is correct, (b), the target small winning combination is won in step S220 and the process ends; however, if the pressing order is incorrect, the process moves to step S230. Although not shown in the figure, if the internally won winning combination is not a composite small winning combination, a predetermined stop control corresponding to other internal winning combinations is performed and the process ends.

When moving to step S230, the main control unit 100 first makes sure to stop one symbol constituting the bonus drawing minor combination on the active line. When the process moves to step S240, if the subsequent stop operation timings match, the main control unit 100 wins the bonus drawing small winning combination in step S250 and ends the process, whereas if the stop operation timings do not match, the main control unit 100 proceeds to step S260. Transition.

When the main control unit 100 moves to step S260, if the bonus is being won internally, the bonus combination is won in step S270, and if the bonus is not being won internally, the main control unit 100 makes the drum part 2 a losing symbol in step S280. Stop and exit.

FIG. 45 is a schematic diagram of a presentation screen displayed by the display presentation device.

The sub-control unit 160 switches and displays the effect images to be displayed on the display effect device 11 according to the gaming state. FIG. 45(A) is a daytime stage screen, which is used when the probability of AT winning is low. FIG. 45(B) is a night stage screen, which is mainly used when the probability of winning an AT is high, so when this screen is displayed, the player feels excited with the anticipation of releasing an AT. When a rare small winning combination (for example, middle cherry, strong watermelon, strong bell, etc.) is won, the sub-control unit 160 performs an AT lottery (AT bonus release lottery) and a high probability lottery. If you win in this high probability lottery, the daytime normal screen will switch to the night screen, and each time you win a replay during AT high probability, a fall lottery will be held with a predetermined probability, so during general games, the daytime normal screen will be displayed. and night screen are displayed alternately at a predetermined frequency. In general, these display screens change the time, weather, etc. depending on the stay mode, such as low probability state, high probability state, or during RB internal winning, in order to suggest the correct mode to the player. By appropriately performing presentations (fake presentations), it is possible to further arouse players' expectations. In addition, normal announcement performances corresponding to various winning combinations are performed.

FIG. 45(C) is a lightning screen at night. When a player operates the start lever from the night stage screen to start a variable display game, the sub-control unit 160 controls when a predetermined condition is met, such as when a rare minor prize is won. An assist lottery (AT lottery) is held every time a lottery is established. When the AT lottery is held, the sub-control section 160 performs an effect of dropping lightning on the night stage screen along with the sound of thunder in synchronization with the operation timing of the stop button section 10 in order to notify the player of this fact. Furthermore, if an AT is won when the daytime stage is displayed, the daytime stage screen is suddenly changed to the night stage screen, and at least two consecutive thunder effects are performed to suggest an AT release sign. Then, when the lightning effect is performed three times in succession from the daytime stage screen and the lightning falls three times in accordance with the operation timing of the stop button section 10, AT release confirmation (AT bonus confirmation) is announced. Therefore, by appropriately generating thunder and lightning, it is possible to arouse the expectations of the players.

As a precursor to the release of AT, a thundering screen at night is used along with a sound effect of ``Gorogoro Dokkaan''. In particular, during the premonitory effect during the general game shown in FIG. 26, when "RB + Bell small role + 1 piece small role" is internally won, the stop button section 10 can be temporarily stopped with the extremely hot effect of AT activation. After setting the machine to a freeze state where it cannot be played, the pressing order for winning the small bell prize is announced. Thereby, it is possible to guide the player to the bonus internal winning state. Furthermore, when the "Red 7 small winning combination and 1 piece small winning combination" shown in FIG. 26 is internally won during the premonition of AT bonus release, the pressing order for winning the Red 7 small winning combination is notified.

The above-mentioned AT lottery is also called a navigation lottery (abbreviation for "navigation lottery"), and when the AT function is activated, the sub-control unit 160 stops in order to win the push order minor winning combination (target minor winning combination). The order of operation of the button section 10 is announced. In addition, when you win an AT lottery, instead of activating the AT function immediately, you can add up and memorize it as AT stock (storage or reserve) and release it all at once at the desired timing, allowing you to play with a large amount of medals. It is possible for the person to acquire the For example, after a special replay of red 7s with a very low probability of winning (a red 7 replay combination in which the red 7 symbols appear to be aligned on the invalid upper horizontal line, middle horizontal line, or lower horizontal line) is won. In the RT state (high probability replay state), if you release all the AT stock for one set of 50 games and then perform an AT lottery during the ART, the ART will continue endlessly without reducing the number of balls you have due to RT, which is a big deal. You can create a mass of balls.

FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram of a presentation screen displayed by the display presentation device.

When announcing an AT win, the sub-control unit 160 displays the night stage screen again in the next variable display game in which the lightning effect shown in FIG. 45(C) has been performed (see FIG. 46(A)), and presses the stop button. In response to the operation in part 10, two bats holding a plate approach from a distance, gradually display the word "BONUS" in a recognizable manner (see Figure 46 (B)), and finally fly away. A bat announcement performance will be held.

In addition, if you scroll the display screen to the right from the night stage screen, the graveyard will be enlarged and the character butler will be able to dig it with a cry of "Orya" and a sound effect of "Tirororororon". By having the main character appear from the grave in the center of the awakened screen, it may be possible to create an extremely exciting premiere performance for the player (see FIG. 46(C)).

FIGS. 47 and 48 are schematic diagrams of presentation screens displayed by the display presentation device.

As described above, when the first game is started by the player's operation after notifying the AT bonus winning, the sub-control unit 160 displays the number of remaining games and the number of acquired coins in the upper right corner of the display effect device 11, and A preparation status screen before ART activation is displayed (see FIG. 47(A)).

When the first game during ART preparation is started and a composite small winning combination (red 7 small winning combination + 1 piece small winning combination) is internally won at that time, the sub control unit 160 makes the target small winning combination red 7 small winning combination win. The order in which the stop button section 10 is pressed is displayed as a number 1. In this case, the number 1, which means the first stop operation, is displayed in a large circle, and "naka" is pronounced in the voice of Dracula or the main character (see FIG. 47(B)). It should be noted that the Red 7 small winning combination will win if the first stop operation is correct, but if the stopping operation is incorrect, a 1 piece small winning combination (bonus drawing small winning combination) will be won or it will be a loss.

When the player operates the middle stop button 10b correctly, the sub-control unit 160 changes the large circle in the center to OK and turns it into a small circle (see FIG. 47(C)).

When the player operates the right stop button 10c at the second stop and the left stop button 10a at the third stop in the state shown in FIG. 47(C), the sub control unit 160 changes the characters "ANY" in the right circle to "OK" (see FIG. 48(A)), and then change the characters "ANY" in the left circle to "OK". In the end, the Red 7 minor winning combination is won, so "15 GET" and the number of acquired coins are changed to "15" (see FIG. 48(B)). For example, if you make a mistake in the first stop operation and operate the incorrect left stop button 10a, the character "ANY" in the circle on the left side will be changed to "x", and the information necessary to win a one-piece small winning combination will be needed. Notify. In this case, "blue" meaning the square (blue) of the middle drum 2b to be aimed at is displayed in an enlarged manner (see FIG. 48(C)). If the middle stop button 10b is operated at the correct timing, the square (blue) symbol will be drawn in and one small winning combination will be won, so if it is inside the bonus, winning of the bonus winning combination can be avoided. This point is an epoch-making original technology with an inventive step.

FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram of a presentation screen displayed by the display presentation device.

In the state of FIG. 48(B), when the next game is started by the player's MAX bet operation, the number of acquired coins is changed to "12". At that time, when "RB+Bell minor win+1 piece minor win" is internally won, the order of pressing the stop button part 10 necessary to win the target minor win, Bell minor win, is displayed with the number 1. In this case, the number 1, which means the first stop operation, is displayed in a large right-hand circle, and "Migi" is pronounced in the voice of Dracula or the main character (see FIG. 49(A)).

When the player correctly operates the right stop button 10c, the sub-control unit 160 changes the large circle character on the right side to OK and turns it into a small circle (see FIG. 49(B)).

In the state shown in FIG. 49(B), when the player operates the left stop button 10a at the second stop → the middle stop button 10b at the third stop, the sub control unit 160 changes the characters "ANY" in the left circle to "OK" ” and then change the letters “ANY” in the middle circle to “OK”. Eventually, the small Bell winning combination is won and the bonus winning combination enters the RT state, which is an internal winning state (high probability replaying state; see FIGS. 26(A) and 26(C)). The sub-control unit 160 changes the screen display of the display effect device 11 to "2GET/ART START", the number of remaining games to "50", and the number of acquired coins to "14" (see FIG. 49(C)). On the other hand, for example, if you make a mistake in the first stop operation and operate the incorrect middle stop button 10b, the character "ANY" in the center circle will be changed to "x", which is necessary to win the 1-card small prize. disseminate information. In this case, "white" meaning the rectangle (white) of the right drum 2c to be aimed at is displayed in an enlarged manner (not shown, but similar to FIG. 48(C)). If the right stop button 10c is operated at the correct timing, the rectangular (white) symbol will be drawn in and one small winning combination will be won, and winning of the bonus winning combination can be avoided, so that the inside bonus state can be maintained. This point is an epoch-making original technology with an inventive step.

When the ART starts, (1) "RB + Bell small hand + 1 piece small hand" or (2) "RB + Red 7 small hand + 1 piece small hand" shown in FIG. 26(C) is internally won, and the sub control unit 160 Since this notifies the order of operations to win the Bell minor winning combination or the Red 7 minor winning combination, the player can continue playing the game while maintaining the RT state and win a large amount of medals. Note that if (3) "RB+Replay" is won internally, one of the multiple types of Replays will definitely win, so there is no need to insert medals in the next game. It is also possible to change the winning replay combination depending on the order of the presses. For example, when winning a red 7 replay for presentation (a replay that looks like red 7s lined up right next to each other), it is possible to avoid a falling replay. In such cases, the sub-control unit 160 is configured to notify the pressing order of reverse pressing, avoidance procedure, etc.

FIG. 50 is a drum symbol arrangement table.

On each of the left drum 2a, the middle drum 2b, and the right drum 2c, a drum band (not shown) on which a left drum pattern, a middle drum pattern, and a right drum pattern are drawn is arranged so that it goes around the outer periphery of each drum. It is attached to.

There are 21 symbols drawn in different rows on each belt, and although it is irregular, the symbol "Blue 7", which activates the bonus role (Type 1 role continuous activation device, hereinafter referred to as "RBB"), "Red 7, white bar", "black bar" with symbols that make up various small roles and various replay roles, "Bell 1", "Bell 2", "Bell 3", "Cherry", "Square (red)", "Rectangle (blue)", "Rectangle (white)", "Pentagon (red)", "Pentagon (blue)", "Pentagon (white)", "Replay 1" and "Replay 2" are drawn.

FIG. 51 is a symbol combination display determination diagram.

When all three drums have stopped, the main control unit 100 determines whether to display combinations of symbols related to winnings and operations on the active line of the window unit 3 according to the number of game medals inserted (dedicated to 3 coins for general games). conduct.

FIG. 51(B) shows the effective lines when the specified number of three game medals are inserted, and the first line (middle, middle, middle: center Only one of the lines (horizontal straight line) is valid. In addition, even in the bonus game (RBB: when the first type accessory continuous operation device is activated), the prescribed number of game medals is three, and the active line is exactly the same, only the first line.

FIG. 52 shows a payout table etc. when the accessory is not activated (during normal game, the specified number is 3).

When all three drums have stopped, the main control unit 100 determines whether to display combinations of symbols related to winning or activation on the active line (see FIG. 52) according to the number of game medals inserted. In this case, the number of sheets inserted is three, and the valid line is only one line horizontally in the center.

(1) Bonus role (RBB: Continuous operation device for special bonuses related to the first class special bonus): Blue 7 on the left drum 2a, red 7 on the middle drum 2b, and white bar on the right drum 2c stopped on the active line. The winning number is 0, and a big bonus game (RBB game) is given after that. There is only one type of bonus combination symbol, and even if it is internally won individually, if the stop operation timing of the stop button part 10 is not correct, the predetermined bonus symbol will not stop on the active line, so it will not be able to be used in the next game or later. It will be carried over to. This RBB game is designed to end when the number of coins paid out (number of coins acquired) exceeds 120, but the number of coins inserted is 3, and the expected number of coins paid out per game is less than 3, as will be explained later. (For example, about 2 medals) Therefore, when the RBB game ends, the number of medals will almost certainly decrease (in other words, the number of medals will almost certainly decrease after the RBB game ends).
The expected value of increasing medals in BB games is negative). In other words, the RBB game is in a gaming state that is disadvantageous for the player. In the normal gaming state (RT0 state: the replay winning probability is approximately 1/7.3 of the predetermined value), if the bonus combination (RBB) is internally won (conditional device activated), the replay winning probability is reduced at least from the next game onwards. It changes and becomes a high probability replay state (RT1 state: replay probability approximately 1/5.5). When this bonus winning symbol is displayed (win) and the RBB game due to the activation of the bonus winning combination ends (end of operation), the replay winning probability changes and returns to the initial state (RT0 state). In other words, the player plays the variable display game in any of the gaming states: RT0 state, RT1 state, and RBB game state. Note that this initial state (state where the replay probability does not change) is a transitional state (game preparation state) until it transitions to the RT1 state, and it is almost never in the RT0 state during actual gaming, and when shipped from the factory. Ship in RT1 state. Similarly, since internally won bonus combinations are rarely won, players rarely play BB games (see FIG. 53(A)).

(2) 1st small role (FR1: 1st target small role): Any symbol (Bell 1/Bell 2/Bell 3) on the left drum 2a, (Bell 1/Bell 2/Bell 3) on the middle drum 2b This is the role name when any of the symbols (Bell 1/Bell 2/Bell 3) are aligned and stopped on the active line on the right drum 2c, and the number of winning coins (number of paid coins) is 9. When the first minor prize is internally won in the winning lottery, the condition device of FR1 (Fruit 1) is set and activated. In FR1, there are 9 types of combination symbols (3 x 3 x 3), and assuming that it is internally won individually, the above-mentioned predetermined bell symbol will be on the active line regardless of the order and timing of the stop button section 10. The symbols are arranged so that you are sure to win when the machine stops (the bell symbol is displayed in a straight line horizontally in the center). In the RT0 state or the RT1 state, the first small winning combination is almost always won at the same time as the one-card small winning combination (inhibiting small winning combination) for controlling the push order. Note that the first target small winning combination is a small winning combination that should be won, and if the pressing order is correct, the winning is won, so it is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the pressing order is incorrect, the inhibiting small combination will either win or lose. When the assist function is activated, the player is informed of the order of operation of the stop button section 10 in order to win the first target small winning combination.

(3) 2nd small role (FR2: 2nd target small role): When the 2nd small role is won, one of the symbols (Bell 1/Bell 2/Bell 3) will be placed on the upper row of the left drum 2a, or on the middle row of the middle drum 2b. (Bell 1/Bell 2/Bell 3) Any of the symbols (Bell 1/Bell 2/Bell 3) will be stopped and displayed on the lower row of the right drum 2c, and the number of acquired pieces (number of paid pieces) will be There will be 9 pieces. However, on the effective line, for example, a replay 2 is stopped on the left drum 2a, a bell 3 is stopped on the middle drum 2b, and a square (blue) is stopped on the right drum 2c (see FIG. 52(B)). When the second minor prize is internally won in the prize lottery, the condition device of FR2 (Fruit 2) is activated. In FR2, there are 9 types of combination symbols (3 x 3 x 3), and assuming that it is internally won individually, the predetermined symbol will stop on the active line regardless of the order and timing of the stop button section 10. The symbols are arranged so that you will definitely win the prize (the bell symbols are displayed in a straight line down to the right). As will be described later, the second small winning combination is almost always won at the same time as the one-card small winning combination (inhibiting small winning combination) for controlling the push order in the RT0 state or the RT1 state. Similarly, the second target minor prize is a minor prize that should be won, and if the pressing order is correct, the prize is won, so it is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the pressing order is incorrect, the inhibiting small combination will either win or lose. When the assist function is activated, the player is informed of the order in which to operate the stop button section 10 in order to win the second target small winning combination.

(4) 3rd small win (FR3: 3rd target small win): When the 3rd small win is won, one of the symbols (Bell 1/Bell 2/Bell 3) will be placed in the lower row of the left drum 2a, or in the middle row of the middle drum 2b. (Bell 1/Bell 2/Bell 3) Any of the symbols (Bell 1/Bell 2/Bell 3) will be stopped and displayed on the upper row of the right drum 2c, and the number of acquired pieces (number of paid pieces) will be There will be 9 pieces. However, on the effective line, for example, a pentagon (white) is stopped on the left drum 2a, a bell 3 is stopped on the middle drum 2b, and a replay 1 is stopped on the right drum 2c (see FIG. 52(C)). When the third minor prize is internally won in the prize lottery, the FR3 (Fruit 3) conditional device is activated. FR3 has 9 types of combination designs (3 x 3 x
In 3), assuming that an internal win is won independently, the symbols are arranged so that the above-mentioned predetermined symbol stops on the active line and always wins the prize, regardless of the order and timing of the stop button section 10. (The bell pattern is displayed in a straight line at the top right). As will be described later, the third small winning combination is almost always won at the same time as the one-card small winning combination (inhibiting small winning combination) for press order control in the RT0 state or the RT1 state. Similarly, the third target small winning combination is a small winning combination that should be won, and it is advantageous for the player because it will win if the pressing order is correct. On the other hand, if the pressing order is incorrect, the inhibiting small combination will either win or lose. When the assist function is activated, the order in which the stop button section 10 is operated in order to win the first target small winning combination is notified.

(5) 1-card small role (inhibiting small role for press order control: FR4 to FRn): This is a small role (bonus inhibiting small role) to prevent the above-mentioned bonus role from being drawn, and if you win, the number of pieces obtained ( The number of coins to be paid out will be one. In addition, this is a small winning combination (bonus inhibiting small winning) for not drawing in each target small winning combination if any of the first to third target small winning combinations is won at the same time and the pressing order is incorrect. Note that n is an arbitrary integer and is determined as necessary in the design, and as a result, the type of one-card small winning combination is n+3.

(6) Middle cherry combination (FRn+1): The cherry symbol is on the left drum 2a, and the middle drum 2b and right drum 2c are the names of the prizes when (ANY symbols) are aligned and stopped on the active line, and the number of pieces obtained is 2. Become. When the middle cherry combination is internally won in the lottery, one conditional device of FRn+1 (Fruit n+1) is activated. In a state where the bonus winning combination is internally won, the middle cherry winning combination is internally winning, and even if the player operates the left stop button 10a near Blue 7, no. No. 10 without stopping the blue 7 symbols on the active line. 7 pentagon (blue) or No. Since the 12 pentagons (white) are stopped and the middle cherry combination is won, the bonus combination is not won.

(7) Lower row cherry role (FRn+2): Black bar (cherry on the lower row) on the left drum 2a, any symbol (Bell 1/Bell 2/Bell 3) on the middle drum, (ANY symbol) on the right drum 2c is valid. This is the name of the role when all the coins are stopped on the line, and the number of coins obtained is 2. When the lower cherry combination is internally won in the lottery, one conditional device of FRn+1 (Fruit n+2) is activated. Even if the bonus winning combination is internally won, the lower cherry winning is internally winning, and the player operates the left stop button 10a near blue 7, no. No. 10 without stopping the blue 7 symbols on the active line. 7 pentagon (blue) or No. Since the 12 pentagons (white) are stopped and the lower cherry combination is won, the bonus combination is not won.

(8) Replay (replay): This is the role name when Replay 1 or Replay 2 symbols are aligned on the active line on three drums, and no medals are acquired for this. When an internal win is won, an RP flag is set in the flag area, and even when this is won alone or when it is won at the same time as a bonus combination, the replay is always won and activated. There are eight types of replay symbols to be combined, and by operating the start lever 9 by the player, the next game can be played without inserting medals. Note that even if replay is activated, it does not trigger a change in RT (probability of winning in replay).

(9) Red 7 replay (replay): This is the role name when the red 7 symbols are aligned on the active line on three drums, and no medals are acquired for this. If it is internally won, a Red 7 RP flag will be placed in the flag area, but it will always be won at the same time as other Replay combinations (not shown), and Red 7 Replay will only win if the push order is correct and the operation timing is appropriate. If you miss the push, one of the other replay roles will definitely win. Even if you win at the same time as the bonus role, any of the re-games will definitely win and operate. This is used to clearly indicate to the player that the assist bonus (generally referred to as the "third bonus") has been won. Red 7 Replay corresponds to the traditional big bonus. Note that even if the red 7 replay is activated, it does not trigger a change in RT (probability of winning in replay).

(10) Blue 7 replay (replay): This is the role name when the blue 7 symbols on the left drum 2a and the red 7 symbols on the other two drums are aligned on the active line, and no medals are acquired for this. If it is internally won, a blue 7 RP flag will be placed in the flag area, but it will always be won at the same time as other replay roles (not shown), and red 7 replay will only win if the push order is correct and the operation timing is appropriate. If you miss a push, one of the other replay roles will always win. Even if you win at the same time as the bonus role, any of the re-games will definitely win and operate. This is used to clearly indicate to the player that the assist bonus (generally referred to as the "third bonus") has been won. Red 7 Replay corresponds to the traditional big bonus. Note that even if the blue 7 replay is activated, it does not trigger a change in RT (probability of winning in a replay).

This example explains the basic configuration, and in addition to the above-mentioned winning combinations, it is also possible to provide rare minor combinations such as watermelon and chance, and other special replay combinations as necessary. . When these rare minor winning combinations are internally won, an additional AT lottery may be performed, or a sub-control unit may draw a lottery to arrange red 7 replay winning combinations during the AT, thereby awarding multiple sets of AT.

FIG. 52(D) is an explanatory diagram of the press order minor winning combination in which a Bell minor winning combination (first to third minor winnings: target minor winning) is won if the pressing order is correct twice.

Push order small roles (1st year of junior high school) are Bell small roles (1st to 3rd minor roles) whose purpose is to win a prize, and multiple types of one-piece small roles whose purpose is to prevent winning of Bell minor roles. A 1-card small winning combination (for example, Red 7 - Square - Pentagon, etc.), and multiple types of other 1-card small winning combinations that make up a 1-card small winning group for the purpose of inhibiting the winning of the first small winning combination (for example, Red 7 - Pentagon, etc.). - Any one of Bells 1 to 3 - Pentagon, etc.) are small winning combinations that can win prizes (see Figure 52(D)). Note that the description of other one-card small winning combinations is omitted in FIG. 52(A).

When the main control section 100 starts the variable display game, the main control section 100 internally wins one of the plurality of press order small winning combinations by lottery, and selects the left drum 2a, middle drum, etc. according to the lottery result and the operation of the stop button section 10. The drum part 2 is controlled to stop so that the right drum 2b and the right drum 2c (a plurality of symbol rows) are stopped at predetermined positions. The ROM 101 stores the operation order of the stop switches as operation order data (in this case, middle→left→right or 2-1-3) in association with a plurality of pressed order minor combinations to be drawn. Further, the ROM 101 stores nine payouts (a predetermined number) for the small bell prize, one payout for the one-piece small prize, and one payout for the other one-piece minor prize.

The main control unit 100 recognizes or confirms the order of operations for winning the Bell minor winning combination among the internally won push order minor winning combinations (in this case, middle → left → right). In addition, the main control unit 100 creates a sliding frame number table for all drum units 2 (left drum 2a, middle drum 2b, and right drum 2c) until the stop operation becomes possible. (Refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-040355). This sliding frame number table shows that the drum section 2 is 0 for the stop operation position.
This is a table for stop control that stores sliding frame number data for moving and stopping within the range of ~4 frames.

For example, the No. of the middle drum 2b. When the middle stop button 10b in the correct press order is operated for the first stop while No. 13 Replay 2 symbol is on the active line, the main control unit 100 moves the middle drum 2b 4 frames and moves the middle drum 2b to No. Control so that the bell 1 symbol of 9 stops. No. of left drum 2a. When the left stop button 10a in the correct pressing order is operated for the second time when the blue 7 symbol of No. 10 is on the active line, the main control unit 100 moves the left drum 2a by one frame and moves the left drum 2a one frame. Control is performed so that the 9 bell 3 symbols stop, and the first small winning combination becomes ten-pai. Then right drum 2
When c is operated for the third stop, any of the Bell 1 to Bell 3 symbols is stopped on the activated line, and the first small winning combination (target small winning combination) is won. When the right stop button 10c in the incorrect pressing order is operated for a second stop, either the square symbol or the pentagon symbol is stopped on the effective line of the right drum 2c, and the other one small winning combination becomes tenpai. After that, one other small prize is won. It should be noted that it is also possible to make the other one small winning combination win or lose. As an example, in the second small combination, the replay-bell-square symbol stops on the active line (see FIG. 52(B)). In addition, in the third small combination, the square-bell-replay symbol stops on the active line (see FIG. 52(C)).

On the other hand, while all the drum parts 2 are rotating, the left drum 2a No. When the left stop button 10a in the incorrect pressing order is operated for the first time when the blue 7 symbol of No. 10 is on the active line, the main control unit 100 moves the left drum 2a three frames and moves the left drum 2a three frames. Control so that the 7 pentagon (blue) pattern stops. Note that the No. of the left drum 2a. It is also possible to stop the 9 bell 3 symbol, but the pentagon (blue) symbol, which has a higher priority, is stopped. With the subsequent second stop operation and third stop operation, the one-piece small winning combination becomes a win or a loss. Note that the right drum 2c is also similar, so the explanation will be omitted.

53 and 54 are conceptual diagrams showing game state transition diagrams and lottery probabilities of various winning combinations. Figure 53 (B) shows the lottery probability during the normal game which is the initial state, Figure 54 (B) shows the lottery probability in RBB, and Figure 54 (B) shows the lottery probability in RBB (during Type 1 BB game). . Note that even if the stage setting values are reset, the gaming state is maintained.

In FIG. 53(A), a general game (described as "general game" in the figure) starts from the next game after the big bonus game (RBB game) ends. The replay probability (probability of winning a replay) in this general game is approximately 1/7.3 (set number 8978/65536) (initial replay state: state where the replay probability is not changing).

In a general game, when RBB, which is a bonus combination, is internally won and RBB wins in that game, the RBB game starts from the next game. The RBB game ends when the number of medals paid out exceeds a predetermined number of 120 medals, and the game enters a normal replay state in which the probability of winning a replay combination is low from the next game. In addition, the general game → RBB is internally won → RBB won → RBB game payout of over 120 coins → RBB game ends → It is almost never a regular game, and the player plays the game in the RBB internal state (hereinafter referred to as "internal (referred to as "medium game") will be repeated. The general game can be said to be in a so-called "preparation state" before transitioning to the internal medium game. The number of RBBs placed is 2,000, and the number of places where RBB and one-piece small winning combination (RBB prize-inhibiting small winnings) are simultaneously won is 2,558, and only the former can win RBB when internally won. However, if you do not consciously aim for the blue 7 symbol, red 7 symbol, and white bar symbol at the timing of internal winning, you will not win the prize, and even if you win, the game medals will only decrease, so it is advantageous for the player to win the prize. There isn't.

On the other hand, even if RBB is internally won in the general game, if RBB is avoided, a high probability replay state (RT1) will occur in which the bonus role is internally won (RBB is internal) (see the shaded area in Figure 53 (A)) ). In this RT1 state, there is no loss (non-winning) as will be described later, so the player can play the variable display game in a very advantageous gaming state. Note that in the RT1 state, the number of losses may be set to about 1 to 10, and a freeze effect may be performed when a loss is drawn with a probability of 1/65536 to 10/65536, thereby adding a large amount of assist functions. In this case, the loss becomes a freeze trigger role or a freeze confirmation role.

During the general game (see FIG. 53(B)), the total number of RBBs is 4558 (2000+2558), and the winning probability is 4558/65536. The numbers of the first minor role, second minor role, and third minor role are each 17,000, and the probability of winning is 17,000/65,536. The total winning probability is 51000/65536, and in this case, any one of the first to third small winning combinations will be internally won with a probability of about 78%. However, basically, to control the push order, a plurality of different one-piece small winning combinations are won at the same time, but the first to third small winning combinations may be won individually. The number of the middle cherry combination is 250, the number of the bottom cherry combination is 750, and the number of the replay combination is 8978. However, basically, a plurality of different replay roles can be won at the same time.

Inside the RBB (see FIG. 54(A)), the RBB lottery is not performed, so the probability of winning is 0. Note that "inside RBB" means a state in which the RBB flag is set and the RBB has already been matched and carried over. This RBB is in a high probability replay state (RT state) in which the replay winning probability fluctuates. The lottery area of 2000 in which RBB wins alone shown in FIG. 53(B) becomes a new replay winning area. Therefore, the original replay number 8978 plus the number 2000 becomes the number 10978, the probability of winning the replay is 10978/65536 (approximately 1/6), and the probability of not winning is 0. In other words, by activating the assist function and notifying the player of the push order to win the 1st to 3rd minor prizes (9 target minor prizes) within the RBB where there is no loss. This allows them to earn medals efficiently. The number 2558 of the area where RBB and one small winning combination are won at the same time is a winning area where only one small winning combination is won. The other details are the same, so the explanation will be omitted.

Calculating the expected value when the assist function is activated in an internal medium game, the probability of winning the 1st to 3rd minor roles is 51000/65536, and the increase in the number of coins is 6 (9 paid out - 3 put in) ), so it is 4.67 cards/game. On the other hand, the probability of winning two cherry combinations is 1000/65536, and the increase in the number of coins is -1 (2 coins paid out - 3 coins put in), so it is -0.03 coins/game. The probability of winning a 1-card small winning combination is 2558/65536, and the increase in the number of coins is -2 (1 coin paid - 3 coins inserted), so it is -0.08 coins/game. Even if you win a replay, you can play the next game without inserting medals, so there is no change in the expected value. Therefore, if AT is activated in an internal medium game and all minor roles including the 1st to 3rd minor roles are won, the average number of winnings will increase by about 4.56 coins/game. It is possible to achieve the highest net increase in number of sheets for the No. 5 machine.

In the RBB game (see Figure 54 (B)), the biggest difference from the internal medium game is that the first, second, and third minor roles can now be won at the same time, and the number of winnings is 17,000. That's what happened. In other words, in the internal medium game, the winning probability is 51000/65536 based on the sum of the first, second, and third minor roles in which the winning areas are dispersed, whereas in the RBB game, the winning area is As a result, the probability of winning the same prize has decreased to 1/3 to 17,000/65,536. Of the remaining 34,000 (51,000-17,000), the number 30,000 and the replay number 10,978 are losers in the RBB game (non-winning: number 40,978), and the other number 4,000 is one piece as an increase hand. This is the area where small roles can be won. However, the number of replays may be set and a lottery may be performed. In other words, in the internal medium game, the winning areas for the first to third minor roles are dispersed, so the target minor roles 1 to 3, which have a payout number of 9 pieces, do not win at the same time, whereas RBB In the game, since the winning areas of the first to third minor prizes match (or overlap), the target minor prizes 1 to 3 with a payout number of nine coins are simultaneously won. As a result, the number of game medals in the RBB game decreases or does not increase.

Calculating the expected number of games until the end of the RBB game, the probability of winning the first to third minor roles at the same time is 17000/65536, and the number of coins paid out is 9, so 2 per game. .33 pieces will be paid out. The probability of winning two cherry winning combinations is 1000/65536, and the number of coins to be paid out is 2, so 0.03 coins are paid out per game.
The probability of winning a 1-card small winning combination is 6558/65536, and the number of coins paid out is 1, so the payout is 0.10 coins per game. The expected payout value per game by adding these together is 2.46 coins (resulting in a decrease of 0.54 coins/game). Since the RBB game ends with a payout of more than 120 coins, it ends in about 49 games on average, so one RBB game results in a decrease of 26.4 coins.

FIG. 55 is a conceptual diagram of the winning area of the small winning combination. It should be noted that the RBB and winning areas of re-gaming combinations are omitted.

The upper diagram of FIG. 55(A) shows the winning area of the minor winning combination in the general game and the RBB internal medium game (see Figure 53(A)), and the lower diagram shows the winning area of the minor winning combination in the RBB game (see Figure 53(A)). It shows the winning area. If the probability of winning a replay role (replay role) in a general game is a predetermined probability (1/7.3), then a bonus internal medium game (a symbol display game in which the carryover means carries over the internal winning state of the bonus role) The probability of winning the replay combination in is a high probability higher than the predetermined probability. This gaming state is called a high probability re-gaming state.

The random number value used for the prize lottery always appears once in one cycle in the range of 0 to 65535, and the main control unit 100 extracts one random number value at the timing of the start operation. In the above figure, the first minor winning combination is internally won when the extracted random number is in the range of n1 to n2-1, the second minor winning is internally won when the extracted random number is in the range of n2 to n3-1, and the extracted random number is indicates that the third minor prize is internally won within the range of n3 to n4-1. As mentioned above, the first to third minor winnings form push order minor winnings by winning simultaneously with a plurality of one-card small winnings and a plurality of other one-card small winnings, respectively (Fig. 55 The same applies to the upper figures of (B) to (D).) If the pressing order is correct, the target small role, the bell small role (the bell symbol appears in a straight line, but it can also be a V-shape or an inverted V-shape), will be won, and if the push order is incorrect, one small role and the other one will be won. A small winning combination will either win or lose. In other words, in a symbol display game in which the internal winning state of the bonus winning combination is carried over, the main control unit 100 sets the winning probability of the replay winning combination to a high probability higher than a predetermined probability, and also sets the probability of winning the replay winning combination to a high probability that is higher than a predetermined probability. The winning combination is drawn in such a way that each person wins separately.

The lower part of FIG. 55(A) shows that the first minor role is internally won when the extracted random number is in the range of n1 to n2-1, and within that range, the first minor role, the second minor role, the first minor role, and This shows that the third minor prize and all of the first to third minor prizes are won at the same time. Then, a plurality of 1-card small winnings and a plurality of other 1-card small winnings that do not fall within the range of n1 to n2-1 are pushed out, and a 1-card small winning group is won in the range of n2 to n2+α, and n2+α+1 to The main control unit 100 draws a lottery using a lottery table in which the probability of losing (not winning) is increased within the range of n4, and as a result, the expected value of the number of coins to be paid out per game is set to the expected value of the number of coins to be paid out per game. It should be less than the number of sheets. In other words, the main control unit 100 controls the bonus game so that the expected value of increase in medals (game media) in one bonus game becomes negative.

As a feature of the present invention, the lottery table used in the bonus game has the same or larger number of small winning combinations compared to the lottery table used in the general game and the RBB internal medium game, but in the latter case, the number of small winning combinations is the same or larger. While the small winning combinations are won separately (or distributed), in the former case, at least some of the small winning combinations are won at the same time and are not won. The lottery is made by increasing the probability. In other words, in the latter case, a lottery area is formed in which the target minor roles (minor roles intended for winning) do not win at the same time, but in the former, a lottery area is formed in which the target minor roles (minor roles intended for winning) do not win at the same time. This is because it forms a lottery area.

The lower part of FIG. 55(B) shows that the first minor winning combination of the pressing order minor winnings is internally won when the extracted random number is in the range of n1 to n2-1, and within that range, the first minor winning and non-pressing winning minor winnings are internally won. This shows that the second minor role, the first minor role, the third minor role of the non-press order minor role, and all of the first minor role to the third minor role are won at the same time. As a result, there is no need for multiple 1-card small roles and multiple other 1-card small roles to be pushed out, and it is possible to make all areas where the 2nd minor role and 3rd minor role were won non-winning. become.

The lower part of FIG. 55(C) shows that the first small winning combination of the pressing order small winnings is internally won when the extracted random number value is in the range of n1 to n2-1, the number of the third small winning combination is equal, and the first small winning combination and the first small winning combination are the same. This shows that the second minor prize, the third minor prize, and the second minor prize of the pressed order minor prizes are won at the same time. This shows that the extrusion amount α and the loss area are increasing.

The lower part of FIG. 55(D) shows that the first minor winning combination of the pressing order minor winnings is internally won when the extracted random number is in the range of n1 to n2-1, and in some of them, the second small winning combination is simultaneously won, and furthermore. In some cases, the 3rd minor role was won at the same time, in some areas where the 2nd minor role was won, the 2nd and 3rd minor roles were won at the same time, and in other areas only the 3rd minor role was won. indicates that he will be elected. This shows that the extrusion amount α and the loss area are increasing.

FIG. 56 is a conceptual diagram of the winning area of the small winning combination. It should be noted that the RBB and winning areas of re-gaming combinations are omitted.

The upper diagram of FIG. 56(A) shows the winning area of the minor winning combination in the general game and the RBB internal medium game (see Figure 53(A)), and the lower diagram shows the winning area of the minor winning combination in the RBB game (see Figure 53(A)). It shows the winning area. If the probability of winning a replay role (replay role) in a general game is a predetermined probability (1/7.3), then a bonus internal medium game (a symbol display game in which the carryover means carries over the internal winning state of the bonus role) The probability of winning the replay combination in is a high probability higher than the predetermined probability. This gaming state is called a high probability re-gaming state. The random number value used for the prize lottery always appears once in one cycle in the range of 0 to 65535, and the main control unit 100 extracts one random number value at the timing of the start operation. The above diagram shows that the first minor prize is internally won when the extracted random number is in the range of n1 to n2-1, and the second minor prize is internally won when the extracted random number is in the range of n2 to n3-1. There is.

The lower part of FIG. It shows that only the role can win. Then, a plurality of 1-card small winnings and a plurality of other 1-card small winnings that do not fall within the range of n1 to n2-1 are pushed out, and a 1-card small winning group is won in the range of n2 to n2+α, and n2+α+1 to The main control unit 100 draws a lottery using a lottery table in which the probability of losing (not winning) is increased within the range of n3, and as a result, the expected value of the number of coins paid out per game is calculated as the expected value of the number of coins put in per game. It should be less than In other words, the main control unit 100 controls the bonus game so that the expected value of increase in medals (game media) in one bonus game becomes negative.

The lower diagram of FIG. This shows that only the second minor role and the first minor role will be won. As a result, there is no need to push out a plurality of one-card small winnings and a plurality of other one-card small winnings, and it becomes possible to make all the areas where the second small winning combination was won non-winning.

The lower part of FIG. 56(C) shows that the first minor winning combination of the pressing order minor winnings is internally won when the extracted random number is in the range of n1 to n2-1, and in some of them, the second small winning combination is simultaneously won, and the second This shows that the second minor prize was won in a part of the area that was the winning area of the minor prize, and that the push-out amount α and the losing area are increasing.

The lower part of FIG. 56(D) shows that the first minor winning combination of the pressing order minor winnings is internally won when the extracted random number is in the range of n1 to n2-1, and in some of them, the second small winning combination is simultaneously won, and the second The second minor prize is won in a part of the winning area of the minor prize, and α increases by the push-out amount, indicating that there is no losing area.

To explain the gaming machine according to the present invention in detail, it is possible to start a game by setting three medals (number of bets) for one game. By operating the start lever 9, the drum section 2 rotates, and by operating the stop button section 10, the drum section 2 is stopped, a display result is derived and displayed, and one game ends. Depending on the display result of the drum section 2, a winning of RBB, a small winning combination, or a replay winning combination may occur, but it may also result in a loss. By operating the start lever 9, it is predetermined whether or not to allow winning by lottery, and a winning flag is set. When a small role is won, a predetermined number of medals are paid out. When an RBB symbol is displayed and a prize is won in a general game or an RBB internal medium game, the gaming state shifts to an RBB game (special gaming state). The total number of medals paid out in the RBB game is accumulated and counted. In this example, a predetermined number of medals, 120, is determined for the RBB game, and when it is determined that the total number of medals paid out in the RBB game exceeds 120, the RBB game is ended. If the winning RBB does not win, the next game and subsequent games will be internal RBB games, and the RBB will be in an internal winning state. The probability of winning the replay combination in the general game is 1/7.3 (predetermined probability), but in the RBB internal medium game, it is in a high probability replay state (high probability higher than the predetermined probability). The first minor role, the second minor role, and the third minor role, which are multiple press order minor roles, are composite minor roles in which the target minor role and the inhibiting minor role are won at the same time, but the first minor role to the third minor role The winning areas of the winning combinations are all different (or at least partially different). This lottery table is used to determine whether or not to allow a prize by lottery using random numbers. In the lottery table used in the RBB game, at least a part of the winning areas of the first minor prize, the second minor prize, and the third minor prize are the same, and the first minor prize, the second minor prize, and the second minor prize are selected according to the extracted random numbers. Either the minor role or the third minor role will be won at the same time. In addition, in terms of design, the numbers of the first to third minor roles are the same, and in the general game or RBB internal medium game, all the winning areas are different, and in the RBB game, all the winning areas are the same. It is desirable to do so. In the RBB game, the area where winnings are not won is increased compared to the RBB internal medium game, and the expected value of the number of coins paid out per RBB game is set to be less than the number of coins put in per game.

In the RBB game, the conventional method is to increase the probability of winning a small winning combination (number placed). However, in the case of the present invention, the overall winning ratio (number) of small winning combinations is the same (or may be slightly increased) in the general game, the RBB internal medium game, and the RBB game. , In an RBB game, winning areas of composite small winning combinations are overlapped to create non-winning areas. As a result, the main control unit 100 controls the RBB game so that the expected value of increase in game media becomes negative during the period from the start to the end of one RBB game. In addition, with reference to FIGS. 54(A) and (B), the overall winning ratio of minor roles means that the first minor role is one target minor role and a total of four obstruction minor roles 1 to 3. Assuming that it is composed of The number of entries is 17,000, and the number of entries is 68,000 as a whole. If the same is true for the second minor prize and the third minor prize, the total number will be tripled to 204,000. In the RBB game, the target small role of the first small role, the target small role of the second small role, and the target small role of the third small role are won at the same time. In addition, in order to prevent the same inhibiting minor roles from overlapping in the same lottery area, the first minor role is inhibition minor roles 1 to 3, the second minor role is inhibiting minor roles 1 to 3, and the third minor role is inhibiting minor roles 1. -3 are won at the same time, and the remaining obstructive small winning combinations are pushed out to other lottery areas and set as a set number.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of small role clear identification information.

FIG. 57(A) shows only one type of bell symbol as small role explicit identification information. FIG. 57(B) shows three types of Bell 1 symbol, Bell 2 symbol, and Bell 3 symbol as small role explicit identification information. Note that the minor prize clear identification information is identification information for clearly indicating to the player that a minor prize has been won, and there may be only one type or two or more types (see Fig. 57(B)). There are three types of cases). The Bell 1 to Bell 3 designs have the same yellow-based bell design, but differ in that the colors of the balls are red, blue, and yellow. Therefore, in the eyes of the player, the symbols appear to be the same (also referred to as similar or closely similar symbols).

When a press order bell minor role (generally a minor role consisting of a target minor role and an inhibiting minor role) is internally won, the stop button unit 10 performs a procedure for winning the target minor role (for example, the middle right, left, When the main control unit 100 stops and displays the symbols constituting the target minor prize on the winning line, the bell symbol (minor prize explicit identification information) is displayed in a straight line (in the order shown in FIG. 57(C)). In the case of this figure, the winning line and the line that is displayed in a straight line are the same, but the line that displays the bell symbol in a straight line is on the upper or lower level, diagonally up or diagonally downward, and is different from the winning line. Good too.

On the other hand, in FIG. 57(D), when the push order Bell minor winning combination is internally won, if the stop button unit 10 is operated in the procedure for winning the target minor winning combination (for example, in the order of right, left, middle), the main The control unit 100 stops and displays the Replay 2 symbol, the Bell 3 symbol, and the square (blue) symbol, which are the symbols constituting the target minor combination, on the winning line, and also displays the Bell 1 symbol, the Bell 3 symbol, and the Bell 1 symbol ( (Small role clear identification information) is displayed diagonally in a straight line downward to the right (see FIG. 57(D)). In other words, although the winning symbols of the target minor winning combination appear to be uneven, the player does not feel any discomfort because the bell minor winning explicit identification information appears to be aligned in a straight line.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of re-gaming combination explicit identification information.

FIG. 58(A) shows only one type of replay symbol as the replay combination explicit identification information. FIG. 58(B) shows three types of replay 1 symbols, replay 2 symbols, and replay 3 symbols as replay combination explicit identification information. Note that the re-gaming role clear identification information is identification information for clearly indicating to the player that the re-gaming role has won, and there may be only one type or two or more types (Fig. 58(B) ), there are three types). Replay 1 to Replay 3 symbols are based on light blue. The Replay 1 symbol and the Replay 2 symbol are different in that the direction of the character's face and the bubble position are different (that is, the symbol shapes are different). In the Replay 1 symbol, the character faces to the left and the bubbles are on the left, whereas in the Replay 2 symbol, the character faces to the right and the bubbles are on the right. The Replay 1 symbol and the Replay 3 symbol are different depending on whether the color of the letters "Replay" is black or white (that is, the colors are different). Therefore, in the eyes of the player, the symbols appear to be the same (also referred to as similar or closely similar symbols).

When the re-gaming combination is internally won, when the left stop button 10a is operated in the first stop operation (for example, pressing the left middle right sequentially or the left middle scissors pushing), the main control unit 100 causes the main control unit 100 to move The replay symbols are stopped and displayed, and the replay symbols (replay combination explicit identification information) are displayed in a straight line (see FIG. 58(C)). In the case of this figure, the winning line and the line that is displayed in a straight line are the same, but the line that displays the replay symbols in a straight line is on the upper or lower level, diagonally up or diagonally downward, and is different from the winning line. Good too. When the re-gaming combination wins, the main control section 100 turns on the inserted coins LED 4a. For example, if the number of winning game winning combinations is three, the same number of three pieces will be lit. Then, when the start lever 9 is operated, the main control section 100 starts the next game.

On the other hand, in FIG. 58(D), when the re-gaming combination is internally won, the stop button section 10 is operated in a predetermined operation order (the left stop button 10a is operated in the first stop operation, the left first operation). , the main control unit 100 stops and displays the black bar symbol, square (white) symbol, and square (blue) symbol on the winning line, and also displays the Replay 3 symbol, Replay 1 symbol, and Replay 2 symbol in a straight line at the top. (See FIG. 58(D)). In other words, although the winning symbols of the re-gaming combination appear to be scattered, the player does not feel any discomfort since the re-gaming combination explicit identification information appears to be aligned in a straight line.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of re-gaming combination explicit identification information.

FIG. 59(A) is an example of a prize-winning mode of what is commonly called a Bell Replay role. When the Bell re-gaming combination 1 is internally won, when the stop button unit 10 is operated in a predetermined operation order (the left stop button 10a is operated in the first stop operation, that is, the left first operation), the main control unit 100 displays the pentagon (white) symbol, square (white) symbol, and cherry symbol stopped on the winning line, and also displays the bell symbol (any of the bell 1 to 3 symbols) in a straight line at the top. (See FIG. 59(A)). In other words, although the winning symbols of the Bell re-gaming role appear to be uneven, the minor role clear identification information appears to be aligned in a straight line, so the player can believe that the minor role has been won even though the winning symbol is a re-gaming role. feel. Therefore, the main control unit 100 activates the timer to delay the lighting of the inserted coin number LED 4a, although it is actually a replay winning combination. For example, the main control unit 100 starts timing (freeze-on) in response to winning of the Bell replay combination 1, and turns on the inserted coins LED 4a after 20 seconds (predetermined time) has elapsed. On the other hand, if either the max bet button 8 or the start lever 9 is operated during timing, the main control unit 100 stops timing (freezes off) and turns on the input number LED 4a. For example, if the number of winning game winning combinations is 3, the same number of 3 pieces will be lit. Then, when the start lever 9 is operated, the main control section 100 starts the next game. As an effect, when a player who feels that he/she has won a small winning combination operates the max bet button 8, the main control unit 100 lights up all the inserted coin number LEDs 4a, so that the player plays the game using the same familiar operation procedure as when winning a small winning combination. becomes possible. In addition, when the external output signal 3 of the external centralized terminal board 170 indicating that the assist function is activated is ON, the left first operation (left middle right or left right middle) will win the Bell re-game winning combination, and the small winning combination clear identification information will be displayed. When the lines are aligned, the main control unit 100 turns off the external output signal 3 and notifies the hall computer of the end of activation of the assist function.

When the Bell re-gaming combination 1 is internally won, if the stop button unit 10 is operated in another predetermined operation order (the right stop button 10c is operated in the first stop operation, that is, the right first operation), the main control The section 100 stops and displays the Replay 3 symbols, Replay 1 symbols, and Replay 2 symbols on the winning line, and also displays similar Replay symbols (however, only the same Replay symbols may be used) in a straight line in the middle row (FIG. 59). (See (B)). In particular, when the left stop button 10a is operated in the second stop operation and the middle stop button 10b is operated in the third stop operation after the right first operation, the main control unit 100 turns on the external output signal 3 of the external centralized terminal board 170. and outputs an AT signal. This can indicate that the assist function has been activated. Although the similar replay symbols are stopped in a straight line in the middle row, they may be stopped diagonally downward or diagonally upward.

When the Bell replay combination 1 is internally won, the stop button section 10 is operated in a different predetermined operation order (the middle stop button 10b is operated with the first stop operation, that is, the middle first operation), and the stop button part 10 is operated in a different predetermined operation order (the middle stop button 10b is operated with the first stop operation, that is, the middle first operation), and If the red 7 symbol exists, the main control unit 100 stops the red 7 symbol on the winning line. If the left stop button 10a is operated in the second stop operation and the red 7 symbol is present in the pull-in range, the main control unit 100 stops the red 7 symbol on the winning line. If the right stop button 10c is operated in the third stop operation and a red 7 symbol exists in the pull-in range, the main control unit 100 stops the red 7 symbol on the winning line and displays the red 7 symbol in a straight line in the middle row. (See FIG. 59(C)). In other words, if the pressing order is the correct sequence of middle, left, and right, and the red 7 symbol is within the pull-in range, the red 7 replay combination can be won. Then, the main control section 100 turns on the external output signal 1 of the external centralized terminal board 170 and outputs a pseudo BB signal. On the other hand, if the red 7 symbol does not exist in the pull-in range in the third stop operation, any bell symbol is stopped (red 7 symbol, red 7 symbol, bell symbol). In this case as well, the replay combination wins, but the external output signal 1 of the external centralized terminal board 170 is not turned on. With the red 7 symbol stopped in the middle of the middle drum 2b, if the right stop button 10c of the incorrect answer procedure is operated in the second stop operation and the red 7 symbol exists in the pull-in range, the main control unit 100 will award a prize. Stop the red 7 symbols on the line. However, even if the left stop button 10a is operated in the third stop operation and there is a red 7 symbol in the pull-in range, the main control unit 100 does not stop the red 7 symbol on the winning line and stops any bell symbol. (Bell symbol, Red 7 symbol, Red 7 symbol). In this case as well, the replay combination wins, but the external output signal 1 of the external centralized terminal board 170 is not turned on. When the Bell replay combination 1 is internally won, the stop button unit 10 is operated in the middle first position, and if the red 7 symbol does not exist in the pull-in range, the main control unit 100 stops the replay 3 symbol on the winning line. let With the subsequent stop operation, the Replay 2 symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle row of the left drum 2a, the Replay 1 symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle row of the right drum 2c, and a similar replay symbol (however, only the same replay symbol is fine) is displayed in a straight line in the middle row. (See FIG. 59(D)).

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of re-gaming combination explicit identification information.

Similarly, FIG. 60(A) is an example of a winning mode of the so-called Bell Replay role. When the Bell re-gaming combination 2 is internally won, when the stop button section 10 is operated in a predetermined operation order (the left stop button 10a is operated in the first stop operation, that is, the left first operation), the main control section 100 displays the square (white) symbol, cherry symbol, and pentagon (blue) symbol stopped on the winning line, and also displays the bell symbol (any one of the bell 1 symbol to the bell 3 symbol) in a straight line at the bottom. (See FIG. 60(A)). In other words, although the winning symbols of the Bell re-gaming role appear to be uneven, the minor role clear identification information appears to be aligned in a straight line, so the player can believe that the minor role has been won even though the winning symbol is a re-gaming role. feel. Therefore, the main control unit 100 activates the timer to delay the lighting of the inserted number of coins LED 4a, similarly to the above-mentioned Bell replay combination 1. For example, the main control unit 100 starts timing when the Bell replay combination 1 is won, and when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, turns on the number of inserted coins LED 4a. On the other hand, if either the max bet button 8 or the start lever 9 is operated during timing, the main control section 100 stops timing and turns on the inserted coins LED 4a. For example, if the number of winning game winning combinations is 3, the same number of 3 pieces will be lit. Then, when the start lever 9 is operated, the main control section 100 starts the next game. As an effect, when a player who feels that he or she has won a small winning combination operates the max bet button 8, the main control unit 100 lights up all the inserted coin number LEDs 4a, so that the player can play the game using the operations that he or she is accustomed to when winning a small winning combination. . In addition, when the external output signal 3 is ON and the bell re-game winning combination is won by the left first operation (left middle right or left right middle) and the small winning combination explicit identification information is aligned, the main control unit 100 outputs an external output. Signal 3 is turned OFF to notify the hall computer of the end of activation of the assist function.

When the Bell replay combination 2 is internally won, if the stop button unit 10 is operated in another predetermined operation order (right first), the main control unit 100 will display the Replay 3 symbol and the Replay 1 symbol on the winning line. , the Replay 2 symbols are stopped and displayed, and the similar Replay symbols are displayed in a straight line in the middle row (see FIG. 60(B)). In particular, when the left stop button 10a is operated in the second stop operation and the middle stop button 10b is operated in the third stop operation after the right first operation, the main control unit 100 turns on the external output signal 3 of the external centralized terminal board 170. and outputs an AT signal. This can indicate that the assist function has been activated. Although the similar replay symbols are stopped in a straight line in the middle row, they may be stopped diagonally downward or diagonally upward.

When the Bell re-gaming combination 2 is internally won, if the stop button section 10 is operated in a different predetermined operation order (middle first operation) and the red 7 symbol exists in the pull-in range, the main control section 100 will win the prize. Stop the red 7 symbols on the line. If the left stop button 10a is operated in the second stop operation and the blue 7 symbol is present in the pull-in range, the main control unit 100 stops the blue 7 symbol on the winning line. If the right stop button 10c is operated in the third stop operation and there is a red 7 symbol in the pull-in range, the main control unit 100 stops the red 7 symbol on the winning line and displays the 7 symbols (blue 7 symbol, red 7 symbol). 7 red symbols) are displayed in a straight line in the middle row (see FIG. 60(C)). In other words, if the pressing order is the correct sequence of middle, left, or right, and the red 7 symbol or the blue 7 symbol exists within the pull-in range, the blue 7 replay combination can be won. Then, the main control section 100 turns on the external output signal 2 of the external centralized terminal board 170 and outputs the pseudo RB signal. On the other hand, if the red 7 symbol does not exist in the pull-in range in the third stop operation, any bell symbol is stopped (blue 7 symbol, red 7 symbol, bell symbol). In this case as well, the replay combination wins, but the external output signal 2 of the external centralized terminal board 170 is not turned on. With the red 7 symbol stopped in the middle of the middle drum 2b, if the right stop button 10c of the incorrect answer procedure is operated in the second stop operation and the red 7 symbol exists in the pull-in range, the main control unit 100 will award a prize. Stop the red 7 symbols on the line. However, even if the left stop button 10a is operated in the third stop operation and there is a blue 7 symbol in the pull-in range, the main control unit 100 does not stop the red 7 symbol on the winning line and stops any bell symbol. (Bell symbol, Red 7 symbol, Red 7 symbol). In this case as well, the replay combination wins, but the external output signal 2 of the external centralized terminal board 170 is not turned on. When the Bell replay combination 2 is internally won, the stop button section 10 is operated in the middle first position, and if the red 7 symbol does not exist in the pull-in range, the main control section 100 stops the replay 3 symbol on the winning line. let With the subsequent stop operation, the Replay 2 symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle row of the left drum 2a, the Replay 1 symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle row of the right drum 2c, and similar replay symbols (however, only the same replay symbol is fine) are displayed in a straight line in the middle row. (See FIG. 60(D)).

FIG. 61 shows the pattern arrangement of the drum.

On each of the left drum 2a, the middle drum 2b, and the right drum 2c, a drum band (not shown) on which a left drum pattern, a middle drum pattern, and a right drum pattern are drawn is arranged so that it goes around the outer periphery of each drum. It is attached to.

Each belt has 20 different patterns drawn on it, including a seven pattern (7 patterns), a BAR pattern, an upper chilli pattern, a lower chilli pattern, a red watermelon pattern, a green watermelon pattern, a blank pattern, and a bell pattern. The design, blue lip design, and white lip design are drawn as clearly shown in the illustration. As shown in FIG. 51, the winning line (also referred to as the "valid line") is only one center horizontal line, so its explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 62 is a configuration diagram of the small winning combination in the pressing order, and the middle 1st is the correct operation procedure.

In the Pachislot industry, the Oshisun Bell Waku is generally used as the Oshisun Small Winning. There are eight types of push order bell roles, push order bell 1a to push order bell 4b, but there is no push order bell for which the left 1st is the correct operation procedure (however, it may be provided depending on the design specifications). In the push order bell 1a, correct operation procedures (order data for middle, left, right (213)) are stored in correspondence with the ROM. When the push order bell 1a is won, FR1 (Fruit 1 minor role), FR2, FR3, and FR4 are internally won at the same time (a flag is raised), and any one of FR1 to FR4 becomes a winning state. FR1 corresponds to a target small role established for the purpose of winning a prize. The winning symbols of FR1 are a bell symbol on the left drum 2a, a bell symbol on the middle drum 2b, and a bell symbol on the right drum 2c (hereinafter, explanations will be made in this order from left to right), and when they are displayed on the winning line. Nine medals or credits (all of which are "gaming value") can be acquired. This bell symbol is yellow-based small winning clear identification information (see FIG. 57), and when a prize is won, it is displayed in a straight line in the symbol display window. However, the number of bell symbols is not limited to one type, and a plurality of bell 1 symbols to bell n symbols whose shapes and colors are slightly changed may be provided as small role explicit identification information.

The winning symbols of FR2 are a red watermelon symbol, a green watermelon symbol, a bell symbol, a blue lip symbol, or a white lip symbol, and when they are displayed on the winning line, one medal or the like can be won. The winning symbols of FR3 are a blue lip symbol, a red watermelon symbol, a top chile symbol, a 7 symbol, or a green watermelon symbol, and when these symbols are displayed on the winning line, one medal or the like can be won. The winning symbols of FR4 are a white repeat symbol, a 7 symbol, a green watermelon symbol, a red watermelon symbol, or a bottom dust symbol, and when displayed on the winning line, one medal etc. can be won. FR2, FR3, and FR4 are inhibiting small winning combinations, which are provided for the purpose of inhibiting winning of the target small winning combination.

In the push order bell 1b, correct operation procedures (order data for middle, left, right (213)) are stored in correspondence with the ROM. When the push order bell 1b is won, FR1, FR2, FR5, and FR6 are internally won at the same time, and any of these four small winning combinations can be won. The winning symbols for FR1, the winning symbols for FR2, and the number of winning symbols are as described above. The winning symbols of FR5 are a blue lip symbol, a red watermelon symbol, an upper chili symbol, a red watermelon symbol, or a lower chili symbol, and when they are displayed on the winning line, one medal etc. can be won. The winning symbols of FR6 are a white repeat symbol, a 7 symbol or a green watermelon symbol, a 7 symbol or a green watermelon symbol, and when displayed on the winning line, one medal etc. can be won. FR2, FR5, FR6 are minor inhibitors.

The reason why the push order bell 1 with the same correct operation procedure is provided in this way is to prevent players from aiming for a one-card small winning combination due to the stopped symbols. For example, when a blue repeat symbol stops on the left drum 2a and a red watermelon symbol stops on the middle drum 2b, if there is only the push order bell 1a, the player should aim for the 7 symbol or the green watermelon symbol and intentionally win the FR3. However, due to the presence of FR5 in the push order bell 1b, there is a possibility of a red watermelon symbol or a bottom dust symbol, so as a result, the player cannot aim for either.

In the push order bell 2a, correct operation procedures (order data of middle, right, left (231)) are stored in correspondence with the ROM. When the push order bell 2a is won, FR1, FR2, FR7 and FR8 are internally won at the same time, and any of these four small winning combinations can be won. The winning symbols for FR1, the winning symbols for FR2, and the number of winning symbols are as described above. The winning symbols of FR7 are a blue repeat symbol, a 7 symbol or a green watermelon symbol, a 7 symbol or a green watermelon symbol, and when displayed on the winning line, one medal etc. can be won. The winning symbols of FR8 are a white repeat symbol, a red watermelon symbol, an upper chili symbol, a red watermelon symbol, or a lower chili symbol, and when they are displayed on the winning line, one medal or the like can be won. FR2, FR7, FR8 are minor inhibitors.

In the push order bell 2b, correct operation procedures (order data of middle right left (231)) are stored in correspondence with the ROM. When the push order bell 2b is won, FR1, FR2, FR9 and FR10 are internally won at the same time, and any of these four small winning combinations can be won. The winning symbols for FR1, the winning symbols for FR2, and the number of winning symbols are as described above. The winning symbols of FR9 are a blue repeat symbol, a 7 symbol, a green watermelon symbol, a red watermelon symbol, or a bottom dust symbol, and when displayed on the winning line, one medal etc. can be won. The winning symbols of FR10 are a white repeat symbol, a red watermelon symbol, a top chile symbol, a 7 symbol, or a green watermelon symbol, and when displayed on the winning line, one medal or the like can be won. FR2, FR9, and FR10 are minor inhibitors. The reason for providing the push order bell 2 with the same correct operation procedure is the same as the push order bell 1.

FIG. 63 is a configuration diagram of the small winning combination in the push order, and the first one on the right is the correct operation procedure.

In the push order bell 3a, correct operation procedures (order data of right, left, center (312)) are stored in correspondence with the ROM. When the push order bell 3a is won, FR1, FR11, FR3 and FR4 are internally won at the same time, and any of these four small winning combinations can be won. The only difference between the push order bell 3a and the push order bell 1a is that FR2 is changed to FR11. The winning symbols of this FR11 are a red watermelon symbol, a green watermelon symbol, a blue lip symbol, a white lip symbol, and a bell symbol, and when they are displayed on the winning line, one medal or the like can be won. F11, FR3, and FR4 are minor inhibitors. The rest is the same as the pressing order bell 1a, so the explanation will be omitted (used). The differences between the push order bell 3b, the push order bell 4a, and the push order bell 4b are the same, so the explanation is omitted (used).
do.

FIG. 64 is a configuration diagram of a replay role.

In the pachislot industry, players are made aware of winnings in replay roles by displaying multiple types of Replay 1 symbols to Replay N symbols (replay role clear identification information) in a straight line on the symbol display window, generally based on light blue. I try to let them do it. However, it does not matter at all whether the straight line display of this replay combination clear identification information is on the winning line or not. On the other hand, as a winning mode of the special replay combination, it is often adopted to display a replay symbol, a bell symbol, a cherry symbol, etc. in a straight line on the right side of the replay symbol.

In the case of this embodiment, when the left stop button 10a is operated in the first stop operation (this is the first left operation, also referred to as a "specific operation"), a prize is won, and the normal replay in which the replay symbols are displayed in a straight line horizontally in the center. 1 and normal replay 2, as well as bell replay 1 and bell in which a prize is won when the left stop button 10a is operated in the first stop operation, and the bell symbol (minor role clear identification information) is displayed horizontally at the top or in a straight line down to the right. Replay 2 is provided.

Normally, when Replay 1 is won, RP1 (REPLAY 1 role), RP2, RP3, RP14, and RP15 are internally won at the same time (a flag is raised), and any one of those 5 REPLAY roles (replay role) can be won. . The winning symbols of RP1 are: the left drum 2a is a blue lip symbol or a white lip symbol, the middle drum 2b is a blue lip symbol or a white lip symbol, and the right drum 2c is a blue lip symbol or a white lip symbol (hereinafter, this left center right (explained in this order), when it is displayed on the winning line, it becomes a re-play winning combination (originally, simply referred to as "re-play"), and the next game is started by inserting game medals etc. (by pressing the button or other button on the storage device). This can be done without relying on the use of game medals (including providing game medals for games) by operating the device. The blue repeat symbol and the white repeat symbol are replay role explicit identification information (replay role explicit identification information), and when a prize is won, they are displayed in a straight line on the center horizontal line of the symbol display window. Normal replay 1 is based on random numbers extracted by the main control unit 100 in both the initial state (state in which the replay probability does not fluctuate) and the RT state (high probability replay state) in which the bonus winning combination is internally won. be done.

The winning symbols of RP2 are a bell symbol on the left, a blue lip symbol or white lip symbol inside, a seven symbol, a red watermelon symbol or a green watermelon symbol on the right, and when it is displayed on the winning line, the re-gaming symbol wins. , a blue repeat symbol or a white repeat symbol (replay role explicit identification information) is displayed in a straight line on the upper right diagonal line of the symbol display window. The winning symbols of RP3 are a bell symbol on the left, a red watermelon symbol or a green watermelon symbol inside, and a BAR symbol, a lower Chile symbol or a BRK (blank) symbol on the right, and when they are displayed on the winning line, the re-gaming symbol is replayed. A prize is won, and a blue repeat symbol or a white repeat symbol (replay role explicit identification information) is displayed in a straight line on the lower horizontal line of the symbol display window.

The winning symbols of RP14 are a 7 symbol on the left, a 7 symbol inside, and a 7 symbol or BAR symbol on the right.When it is displayed on the winning line, a re-gaming symbol is won, and a 7 symbol is displayed on the center horizontal line of the symbol display window. The symbols, seven symbols, seven symbols, or BAR symbols are displayed in a straight line. As will be described later, depending on the order and timing of operation of the stop button section 10, only the seven symbols, seven symbols, and seven symbols actually win, and the kick-off control by the main control section 100 causes the seven symbols, seven symbols, and BAR symbols to win. It will never be displayed. The winning symbols of RP15 are a 7 symbol or a bell symbol on the left, a 7 symbol in the middle, and a bell symbol on the right, and when it is displayed on the winning line, the re-game winning symbol will be won, but the symbol display window will not show the winning symbol ( It will be displayed as ``Loss''.

When Normal Replay 2 is won, RP1, RP2, RP14, and RP15 are internally won at the same time (a flag is raised), and any one of these four REPLAY combinations can be won (the winning symbols are as described above). As will be described later, in RP14, depending on the order and timing of operation of the stop button section 10, only the seven symbols, seven symbols, and BAR symbols actually win, and the kick-off control by the main control section 100 allows the winning of seven symbols, seven symbols, and seven symbols. The pattern is never displayed. The main control unit 100 does not draw the normal replay 2 in the initial state, but draws the winning combination based on the extracted random number in the RT state in which the bonus winning combination (RBB or CBB of the accessory continuous operation device) is internally won. That is, it means that the normal replay 2 becomes a lottery target on the condition that the high probability replay state is reached.

When Bell Replay 1 is won, RP1, RP2, RP3, RP4, RP14, and RP15 are internally won at the same time (a flag is raised), and any one of those six REPLAY roles can win (RP1, RP2, RP3, The winning symbols for RP14 and RP15 are as described above). The winning symbols of RP4 are a blue repeat symbol or a white repeat symbol on the left, a bell symbol inside, a seven symbol, a red watermelon symbol, or a green watermelon symbol on the right, and when it is displayed on the winning line, the replaying symbol wins. , the bell symbol (minor role explicit identification information) is displayed in a straight line on the diagonal line downward to the right of the symbol display window. If Bell Replay 1 is won, the main control unit 100 will win RP4 on condition that the left stop button 10a is operated in the first stop operation and the left drum 2a (specific reel drum) is stopped (second The order of the third stop operation does not matter). On the other hand, if a button other than the left stop button 10a is operated in the first stop operation, the main control unit 100 executes stop control so as not to win RP4. For example, when the right stop button 10c is operated in the first stop operation, any of RP1 to RP3 will be won, and the blue repeat symbol or white repeat symbol (replay role clear identification information) will be displayed in a straight line in the symbol display window. do. When the middle stop button 10b is operated at the timing when the seven symbol can be drawn in in the first stop operation, the seven symbol is stopped in the middle. Similarly, when the left stop button 10a is operated in the second stop operation at a timing when the seven symbol can be drawn in, the seven symbol is stopped to the left. Then, when the right stop button 10c is operated at the timing when the seven symbol can be drawn in in the third stop operation, the seven symbol is stopped to the right, and the seven symbol, seven symbol, seven symbol is displayed on the center horizontal line of the symbol display window. Displayed in a straight line (RP14 prize). However, if the operation is performed at a time when the BAR symbol can be pulled in but the Seven symbol cannot be pulled in (No. 7 red watermelon symbol position), the bell symbol will be stopped to the right and RP15 will be won. In other words, even if the pressing order is correct, the seven symbols, seven symbols, and BAR symbols of RP14 do not stop. Further, even if the right stop button 10c is operated at the timing when the seven symbol can be drawn in in the second stop operation, the bell symbol is stopped without stopping the seven symbol to the right. Therefore, if the pressing order is incorrect, RP14 will not win, but RP15 will win. The main control unit 100 does not draw Bell Replay 1 in the initial state, but draws a winning combination based on the extracted random number in the RT state in which the bonus winning combination is internally won.

When Bell Replay 2 is won, RP1, RP2, RP3, RP5, RP14, and RP15 are internally won at the same time (a flag is raised), and any one of those six REPLAY roles can win (RP1, RP2, RP3, The winning symbols for RP14 and RP15 are as described above). The winning symbols of RP5 are a blue repeat symbol or a white repeat symbol on the left, a red watermelon symbol or a green watermelon symbol inside, and an upper chili symbol or BRK symbol on the right, and when it is displayed on the winning line, the replay symbol is won. Then, the bell symbol (minor role explicit identification information) is displayed in a straight line on the upper horizontal line of the symbol display window. If Bell Replay 2 is won, the main control unit 100 will win RP5 on the condition that the left stop button 10a is operated in the first stop operation to stop the left drum 2a (specific reel drum). The order of the third stop operation does not matter). On the other hand, if a button other than the left stop button 10a is operated in the first stop operation, the main control unit 100 executes stop control so as not to win RP4. For example, when the right stop button 10c is operated in the first stop operation, any of RP1 to RP3 will be won, and the blue repeat symbol or white repeat symbol (replay role clear identification information) will be displayed in a straight line in the symbol display window. do. When the middle stop button 10b is operated at the timing when the seven symbol can be drawn in in the first stop operation, the seven symbol is stopped in the middle. Similarly, when the left stop button 10a is operated in the second stop operation at a timing when the seven symbol can be drawn in, the seven symbol is stopped to the left. Then, when the right stop button 10c is operated at the timing when the BAR symbol can be drawn in in the third stop operation, the BAR symbol is stopped to the right, and the seven symbol, the seven symbol, and the BAR symbol are displayed on the horizontal line in the center of the symbol display window. Displayed in a straight line (RP14 prize). However, if the operation is performed at a timing when the Seven symbol can be drawn but the BAR symbol cannot be drawn (No. 4 blank symbol position), the Bell symbol will be stopped to the right and RP15 will be won. In other words, even if the pressing order is correct, the seven symbols, seven symbols, and seven symbols of RP14 do not stop. Further, even if the right stop button 10c is operated at the timing when the BAR pattern can be drawn in in the second stop operation, the bell pattern is stopped without stopping the BAR pattern to the right. Therefore, if the pressing order is incorrect, RP14 will not win, but RP15 will win. The main control unit 100 does not draw Bell Replay 2 in the initial state, but draws a winning combination based on the extracted random number in the RT state in which the bonus winning combination is internally won.

FIG. 65 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window portion in chronological order.

In the game inside the RBB shown in FIG. 53(A), the RBB flag is set, and the game media decreases in the inside of the RBB which is in a high probability replay state (see the shaded area in FIG. 53(A)). The mainstream of modern slot machines is to repeatedly play a normal game and a special game in which the amount of game media increases. The reason why the number of game media decreases in the normal game is that the internally won small winning combinations are missed. On the other hand, the reason why the number of game media increases in the special game is that the operation sequence (or operation procedure) for winning the target minor combination (for example, the range of 8 to 15 coins) of the internally won push-order minor combination is This is because the player receives a payout of more coins than the number of coins inserted (3 coins). As a result, the expected value of the increase in the number of coins per game can be set to about 3 to 4 coins. In addition, the CBB (class 2 special role continuous operating device) may be set to an internal winning state, but in this case, for example, when 2 coins are inserted, 2 coins are always paid out, and the CBB is ended when a predetermined number is exceeded. Therefore, there is no increase or decrease in game media during the CBB game. Similarly, the RB flag is set in the game inside the RB shown in FIG. You may repeat the increasing number of special games. The symbol combination for the bonus combination (RBB, RB, CBB) will be explained as having a BAR symbol on the left, a green watermelon symbol inside, and a red watermelon symbol on the right.

The main control unit 100 sets flags FR1 to FR4 when the push order bell 1a shown in FIG. 62 is won by random number lottery in a game in which a bonus combination has been internally won. Therefore, as an internal winning state, five flags, the bonus flag and the FR1 flag to FR4 flag, will be set. The main control unit 100 is configured to give priority to small winning symbols over bonus symbols and perform control to draw them onto the winning line and stop them. In other words, when the bonus symbol and the minor symbol are internally won at the same time, when both the bonus symbol and the minor symbol can be stopped on the winning line, the main control unit 100 preferentially selects the minor symbol on the winning line. It stops at the top.

The main control unit 100 creates a sliding frame number table based on the stored stop control data and the correct operation procedure (order data of middle left and right (213)) until all the drums of the drum unit 2 rotate at a constant speed. create. For example, when the middle stop button 10b is pressed at the first stop, no. Assuming that the blue repeat symbol of 7 is operated at a position on the winning line, in that case, slide 4 frames and win No. The 3 bell symbol is stopped on the winning line. Naturally, No. If the 6 blank symbol is operated at a position on the winning line, then 3 frames are slid and the No. 6 blank symbol is operated at a position on the winning line. When it is a blue rep symbol of 5, slide 2 frames, No. When the number 4 is the green watermelon symbol, it is slid one frame, and the number 4 is the green watermelon symbol. When the bell symbol is 3, it is slid 0 frames. In this way, the number of sliding frames for moving the reel is calculated in advance for all operation positions (60 frame positions in total), and the reel is moved and stopped immediately after the stop operation.

When the player operates the middle stop button 10b at the first stop while all the drums of the drum unit 2 are rotating (see FIG. 65(A)), the main control section 100 controls the main control section 100. ), the middle drum 2b is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and the common bell symbols of FR1 and FR2 are stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 65(C)). In this case, it is the correct operating procedure, so No. When the blue repeat symbol of 7 is operated on the winning line, slide 4 frames and win No. This shows that the bell symbol 3 is stopped on the winning line. In this state, there is a possibility that both FR1 and FR2 will win, but neither FR3 nor FR4 will be able to win.

When the player operates the left stop button 10a at the second stop (see FIG. 65(D)), the main control unit 100 controls the left drum 2a to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and moves the bell symbol of FR1 to the winning line. It is stopped at the top (see FIG. 65(E)). In this case, it is the correct operation procedure, so No. When the top spot symbol of 12 is operated on the winning line, 2 frames are slid and No. The 10 bell symbols are stopped on the winning line, indicating that FR1, a small winning combination with a large number of payouts, is at full strength. When the player operates the right stop button 10c at the third stop, the main control unit 100 controls the right drum 2c to stop based on the sliding piece number data, and stops the bell symbol of FR1 on the winning line (FIG. 65) See F). In this case, only FR1 has a chance of winning (FR2 cannot win), but the bell symbols are arranged on the right drum 2c at 4 frame intervals (or within 0 to 4 frame intervals), and any Since the bell symbol of No. 8 can be stopped on the winning line (for example, the bell symbol of No. 8), FR1 will definitely win. Therefore, when the target small winning combination (FR1) of the push order bell 1a wins, the bell symbols (small winning explicit identification information) are displayed in a straight line in the symbol display window. However, the number of bell symbols is not limited to one type, and a plurality of bell 1 symbols to bell n symbols whose shapes and colors are slightly changed may be provided as small role explicit identification information. Further, the small winning combination explicit identification information does not necessarily need to be stopped on the winning line, and the bell symbols may be displayed in a straight line in the symbol display window even on the non-winning line.

FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window portion in chronological order.

66(A) to FIG. 66(C) are in exactly the same state as FIG. 65(A) to FIG. 65(C), so the explanation will be used. When the player operates the right stop button 10c in the second stop (see FIG. 66(D)), the main control unit 100 controls the right drum 2c to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and controls the right drum 2c to stop with the blue repeat symbol of FR2 or the white The reply symbol is stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 66(E)). In this case, the operation procedure is incorrect, so No. When the top spot symbol of 9 is operated on the winning line, it will slide 3 frames and the No. The white repeat symbol of 6 is stopped on the winning line, indicating that FR2, which is a small winning combination with a small number of payouts but a large number of symbol combinations, has reached the tenpai state. When the player operates the left stop button 10a at the third stop, the main control unit 100 controls the left drum 2a to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and stops the blue repeat symbol or white repeat symbol of FR2 on the winning line. (See FIG. 66(F)). In this case, there is only a possibility of winning in FR2 (FR1 is in a state where it is not possible to win), but blue repeat symbols or white repeat symbols are placed on the left drum 2a at 4 frame intervals (or within 0 to 4 frame intervals). Since any blue repeat symbol or white repeat symbol can be stopped on the winning line (for example, the No. 1 blue repeat symbol), FR2 is sure to win. Therefore, FR2 can be said to be a small winning combination (second inhibiting small winning combination) that is intended to inhibit the winning of FR1 when the first stopping operation is correct and the second stopping operation is incorrect. In addition, it is possible to make FR2 miss with a probability of 1/2 to 1/4, but the small winning combinations that are won at the same time will be complicated as a prank, and even if you win, there will be only one piece, so the ball output rate will be affected. Since it does not have much of an effect, even if the second stop is a mistake, FR2 will always win a prize.

FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window portion in chronological order.

Since FIG. 67(A) is in exactly the same state as FIG. 65(A), the explanation will be used here.

When the player operates the left stop button 10a at the first stop while all the drums of the drum unit 2 are rotating (see FIG. 67(A)), the main control section 100 controls the main control section 100. ), the left drum 2a is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and either the blue repeat symbol of FR3 or the white repeat symbol of FR4 is stopped on the winning line. In this case, the operation procedure is incorrect, so No. When the red watermelon symbol number 4 is operated on the winning line, slide 3 frames and win the number FR3. This shows that the blue repeat symbol 1 has been stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 67(C)). This is because the FR3 symbol combination, which has a small number of payouts but a large number of symbol combinations, is drawn in with priority, and at this point, only FR3 has a chance of winning (FR1, FR2, and FR4 are in a state where it is impossible to win). Become). In addition, it should be noted that FR1's No. 4 was originally slid by 4 frames. Although it is possible to make the 20 bell symbols stop on the winning line, FR3 prevents the winning of FR1. If the operation timings are different, the white repeat symbol of FR4 will stop on the winning line, so only FR4 will have a chance of winning. Therefore, FR3 and FR4 can be said to be small winning combinations (first inhibiting small winning combinations) intended to inhibit the winning of FR1 when the first stop operation is incorrect. For FR3 to win, the condition is that the red watermelon symbol or top chili symbol stops on the middle drum 2b, and the seven symbol or green watermelon symbol stops on the right drum 2c, but the probability of stopping is 1 for the middle drum 2b. /2 and the right drum 2c is 1/2, so FR3 will win only with a probability of 1/4. Similarly, for FR4 to win, the condition is that the seven symbol or the green watermelon symbol stops on the middle drum 2b, and the red watermelon symbol or the bottom chilli symbol stops on the right drum 2c, but the probability of stopping is Since 2b is 1/2 and right drum 2c is 1/2, FR3 will win only with a 1/4 probability.

When the player operates the middle stop button 10b at the second stop, the main control unit 100 controls the middle drum 2b to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and displays the red watermelon symbol or the bottom dust symbol of FR3 with a probability of 1/2. to stop it on the winning line (see FIG. 67(D). In this example, the red watermelon symbol). On the other hand, since it is not possible to stop the red watermelon symbol and the lower chili symbol of FR3 on the winning line with a probability of 1/2, they are stopped on the dotted line (see FIG. 67(F)). When the player operates the right stop button 10c at the third stop in the state shown in FIG. If the symbol is stopped on the winning line with a probability of 1/2, FR3 will win (see FIG. 67(E). In this example, it is a seven symbol). In other words, when the push order minor winning combination is internally won, if the left stop button 10a is operated in the first stop operation, there is only a 1/4 probability that one small winning combination will be won, so the game media will not be consumed. It becomes possible. If the player stops the drums other than the left drum 2a (specific reel drum) by the first stop operation, the lottery for performing a specific game (for example, an assist game) will not be drawn, and the extinguished game will be added to the number of ceiling games. This gives a big penalty for not doing so. Even if the player operates the stop button units 10 in the right-center-left order with the intention of incurring a penalty, the amount of game media will decrease as a result.

FIG. 68 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window portion in chronological order.

Since FIG. 68(A) is in exactly the same state as FIG. 65(A), the explanation will be used here.

When the player operates the right stop button 10c at the first stop while all the drums of the drum unit 2 are rotating (see FIG. 68(A)), the main control section 100 controls the main control section 100. ), the right drum 2c is stopped based on the sliding frame number data, and either the seven symbol or the green watermelon symbol of FR3, or the red watermelon symbol or the bottom dust symbol of FR4 is stopped on the winning line. In this case, the operation procedure is incorrect, so No. When the white repeat symbol of 11 is operated on the winning line, it is slid one frame and the No. FR3 symbol is operated. This shows that the 10 bottom spot symbol has been stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 68(C)). This is because the FR4 symbol combination, which has a small number of payouts but a large number of symbol combinations, is drawn in with priority, and at this point, only FR4 has a chance of winning (FR1, FR2, and FR3 are in a state where it is impossible to win). Become). In addition, it should be noted that FR1's No. 3 was originally slid three frames. It is also possible to stop the 8 bell symbol on the winning line, but FR4 prevents the winning of FR1. If the operation timings are different, the red watermelon symbol of FR4, the seven symbol of FR3, or the green watermelon symbol will stop on the winning line, so in any case, only FR3 or FR4 has a possibility of winning. Therefore, FR3 and FR4 can be said to be small winning combinations (first inhibiting small winning combinations) intended to inhibit the winning of FR1 when the first stop operation is incorrect. For FR4 to win, the condition is that the white repeat symbol stops on the left drum 2a and the seven symbol or green watermelon symbol stops on the middle drum 2b, so it only wins with a predetermined probability (in other words, FR3 may be missed).

When the player operates the middle stop button 10b at the second stop, the main control unit 100 controls the middle drum 2b to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and displays the FR4 seven symbol or the green watermelon symbol with a probability of 1/2. It is stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 68(D); in this example, the green watermelon symbol). On the other hand, since it is not possible to stop the FR4 seven symbol and the green watermelon symbol on the winning line with a probability of 1/2, they are stopped on the dotted line (see FIG. 68(F)). When the player operates the left stop button 10a at the third stop in the state shown in FIG. If it stops on the winning line with a probability of /4, FR4 will win (see FIG. 68(E)). In other words, when the push order minor winning combination is internally won, if the right stop button 10c is operated in the first stop operation, one small winning combination will only be won with a predetermined probability (low probability), so the game media It becomes possible to consume it. Note that the main control unit 100 performs similar stop control for the other seven push order bells (push order bell 1b to push order bell 4b), so a description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 69 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window portion in chronological order.

In the normal replay 1, both the general game and the RBB internal medium game shown in FIG. 53(A) are lottery targets. On the other hand, normal replay 2, bell replay 1, and bell replay 2 are lottery targets in the RBB internal medium game, but are not drawn in the general game. In other words, in a game inside the RBB (see the shaded area in FIG. 53(A)) in which the RBB flag is raised and a high probability replay state is entered, all replay combinations are randomly drawn for the first time. Basically, players can repeat normal games and special games in which the assist function is activated in the gaming state inside RBB, but internally won RBBs only win when they win alone or when they enter the solo winning state. Sometimes, if you aim for the BAR symbol on the left, the green watermelon symbol inside, and the red watermelon symbol on the right, you will win a prize, but this situation is extremely rare, and if you land an RBB, you will only be penalized. Rather, in the bonus game, the medals decrease or remain the same (they neither increase nor decrease), so they do not dare to win RBB. Furthermore, even if the stage setting values are re-entered, the state inside the RBB is maintained, so the player plays the game in this gaming state.

The main control unit 100 sets flags RP1 to RP3, RP14, and RP15 when the normal replay 1 shown in FIG. 64 is won by random number lottery in a game in which a bonus combination has been internally won. Therefore, as a result, the six bonus flags, RP1 to RP3, RP14, and RP15 flags will be set as internal winning states. In addition, the main control unit 100 performs control to prioritize replay symbols over bonus symbols and draw them onto the winning line and stop them, and since any replay symbol always wins, the bonus symbol wins when the replay symbol is won. There's nothing to do.

The main control unit 100 creates a sliding frame number table based on the stored stop control data, operation procedure, and operation position (operation timing) until all the drums of the drum unit 2 rotate at a constant speed. For example, when the middle stop button 10b is pressed at the first stop, no. Assuming that the 15 bell symbol is operated at a position on the winning line, in that case, slide 4 frames and win No. The 11 white repeat symbols are stopped on the winning line. Naturally, No. When the 14 red watermelon symbol is operated at a position on the winning line, 3 frames are slid and No. When it is the bottom dust symbol of 13, slide 2 frames, No. When it is a 12 top dust symbol, slide one frame, and no. When it comes to the 11 white rep symbol, it is slid by 0 frames. In this way, the number of sliding frames for moving the reel is calculated in advance for all operation positions (60 frame positions in total), and the reel is moved and stopped immediately after the stop operation.

The main control unit 100 controls when the player operates the left stop button 10a at the first stop (operates or operates according to a predetermined operating procedure) while all the drums of the drum unit 2 are rotating (see FIG. 69(A)). When the left drum 2a is stopped (see FIG. 69(B)), the left drum 2a is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and either the blue repeat symbol or the white repeat symbol of RP1 is stopped on the winning line. In this case, the first stop operation is the left stop button 10a (left 1st), and the No. When 15 bell symbols are operated on the winning line, slide 4 frames and win RP1 No. This shows that the 11 white repeat symbols are stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 69(C)). This is because the main control unit 100 is programmed to perform stop control so that if the first stop operation is the left stop button 10a and the left drum 2a stops first, RP1 wins. At this point, only RP1 can win.

When the player operates the middle stop button 10b at the second stop, the main control unit 100 controls the middle drum 2b to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and moves either the blue repeat symbol or the white repeat symbol of RP1 to the winning line. Stop at the top. In this case, No. The 10 blue print symbols are shown in a stopped state (see FIG. 69(D)). When the right stop button 10c is operated at the subsequent third stop, the right drum 2c is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and either the blue repeat symbol or the white repeat symbol of RP1 is stopped on the winning line. In this case, No. 1 blue repeat symbol is shown in a stopped state, and when RP1 wins, replay role explicit identification information (replay role explicit identification information) is displayed in a straight line on the center horizontal line of the symbol display window (Fig. 69 (E) )reference). FIG. 69(F) shows a case where the player operates the right stop button 10c at the second stop (presses the scissors) and stops in the same way, and when RP1 wins, the replay role clear identification information is displayed as a symbol. It is displayed in a straight line on the central horizontal line of the window (see FIG. 69(E)).

FIG. 70 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window portion in chronological order.

Since FIG. 70(A) is in exactly the same state as FIG. 69(A), the explanation will be used here.

The main control unit 100 controls whether the player reaches No. 1 at the first stop. When the middle stop button 10b is operated (operated according to a specific operating procedure) at the timing when the seven symbol 2 can be pulled in (see Fig. 70 (B)), the middle drum 2b is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and RP14 and RP15 are The common seven symbols are stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 70(C)). The main control unit 100 controls the number when the player presses the left stop button 10a at the second stop. If you operate it at the timing to pull in the 7 symbol of 2 (operate according to the prescribed operating procedure. Left 2nd), the middle drum 2b will be stopped based on the sliding frame number data, and the 7 symbol common to RP14 and RP15 will be placed on the winning line. (See FIG. 70(D)). Then, the main control unit 100 causes the player to press the right stop button 10c at the third stop. If you operate it at the timing to draw in the 7 symbol of 2 (operate according to the predetermined operating procedure. Right 3rd), the middle drum 2b will be stopped based on the sliding piece number data, the 7 symbol of RP14 will be stopped on the winning line, and the 7 symbol of RP14 will be stopped on the winning line. is won (see FIG. 70(E)), but if the third stop operation is performed at a timing when the seven symbol cannot be drawn, the bell symbol is stopped on the winning line and RP15 is won (not shown). On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 70(C), if the left 2nd operation is performed at a timing when the seven symbol cannot be drawn, the bell symbol of RP15 is stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 70(F)). Note that in the state shown in FIG. 70(D), No. 5 or no. Even if the right 3rd operation is performed at the timing when the RP14 BAR symbol can be pulled in, the main control unit 100 does not stop the RP14 BAR symbol on the winning line. The 3rd prize bell symbol is stopped on the winning line. In other words, in the case of normal replay 1, if the seven symbols can be drawn in a specific order of operation (in the order of middle left and right), three seven symbols will be displayed in a straight line and RP14 will win, while the third stop Even if the BAR symbol can be drawn in, RP14 does not win, but RP15 wins. It should be noted that the main control unit 100 allows the player to press the intermediate stop button 10b at the first stop and press the middle stop button 10b at the No. 1 stop. If the player operates at a timing when the number 2 Seven symbol cannot be drawn, the middle drum 2b is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and either the blue repeat symbol or the white repeat symbol is stopped on the winning line (not shown). In the subsequent operation, either RP1 or RP2 wins, and a blue repeat symbol or a white repeat symbol (replay combination clear identification information) is displayed in a straight line in the middle of the symbol display window or in a straight line diagonally upward to the right (not shown). In addition, when the 2nd right operation is performed in the state of Fig. 70 (C), the bell symbol stops, and when the third stop operation is performed, the bell symbol stops and RP15 is won (the stop display mode is "Bell symbol, 7 ``Design, bell design'').

FIG. 71 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window portion in chronological order.

Since FIG. 71(A) is in exactly the same state as FIG. 69(A), the explanation will be used here.

The main control unit 100 controls whether the player reaches No. 1 at the first stop. When the right stop button 10c is operated at the timing when the bottom dust symbol of 10 can be pulled in (see Fig. 71(B)), the right drum 2c is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and the bottom dust symbol of RP3 is placed on the winning line. (See FIG. 71(C)). In this state, it is already impossible to win any prizes other than RP3. The main control unit 100 controls the player to press the middle stop button 10b at the second stop. If the operation is performed when the lower dust symbol No. 12 is located in the upper row, the middle drum 2b is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and 4 frames are slid. The red watermelon symbol number 9 is stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 71(D)). Furthermore, the player presses the left stop button 10a at the third stop. If the operation is performed when the lower dust symbol No. 13 is located in the upper row, the left drum 2a is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and 4 frames are slid. Stop 10 bell symbols on the winning line. When RP3 wins, a blue repeat symbol or a white repeat symbol (replay combination clear identification information) is displayed in a straight horizontal line at the bottom of the symbol display window (see FIG. 71(E)). FIG. 71(F) shows a case where the player operates the left stop button 10a at the same timing during the second stop, and in any case, RP3 will definitely win.

Description of normal replay 2 (not shown):
The main control unit 100 sets flags RP1, RP2, RP14, and RP15 when the normal replay 2 shown in FIG. 64 is won by random number lottery in a game in which a bonus combination is internally won. Therefore, as a result, five flags, the bonus flag, RP1, RP2, RP14, and RP15, are set as internal winning states. In addition, the main control unit 100 performs control to prioritize replay symbols over bonus symbols and draw them onto the winning line and stop them, and since one of the replay symbols will always win, the bonus symbol will be won when the replay symbol is won. There's nothing to do.

When the player operates the left stop button 10a at the first stop (sequential press or scissors press), the main control unit 100 controls the left drum 2a to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and controls the left drum 2a to stop when the player presses the left drum 2a at the first stop. Any of the symbols is stopped on the winning line, and RP1 is made to win by the subsequent stopping operation. If you aim for the 7 symbol in the middle 1st, the 7 symbol in the 2nd left, and the BAR symbol in the 3rd right, RP14 will win and (7 symbol, 7 symbol, BAR symbol) will be displayed on the horizontal line in the center of the symbol display window. Ru. If you miss it, another symbol RP15 or RP1 will be awarded. When the right 1st stop operation is performed, RP2 is won, and the replay combination clear identification information (replay winning combination clear identification information) is displayed in a straight line on the diagonally upward line to the right of the symbol display window.

FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window portion in chronological order.

The main control unit 100 determines, as shown in FIG.
When the Bell Replay 1 shown in is won, the RP1 to RP4, RP14 and RP15 flags are set. Therefore, as an internal winning state, seven flags including the bonus flag, RP1 to RP4, RP14 and RP15 will be set. In addition, the main control unit 100 performs control to prioritize replay symbols over bonus symbols and draw them onto the winning line and stop them, and since one of the replay symbols will always win, the bonus symbol will be won when the replay symbol is won. There's nothing to do.

When the player operates the left stop button 10a at the first stop (operation according to a predetermined operating procedure or left 1st operation) (see FIG. 72(B)), the main control unit 100 controls the left drum 2a based on the sliding frame number data. is stopped and either the blue repeat symbol or the white repeat symbol, which is a symbol common to RP1 and RP4, is stopped on the winning line. In this case, the first stop operation is the left stop button 10a (left 1st), and the No. When 15 bell symbols are operated on the winning line, slide 4 frames and win No. 1 of RP1 and RP4. This shows that the 11 white repeat symbols are stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 72(C)). This is so that when the first stop operation is the left stop button 10a and the left drum 2a stops first, the main control unit 100 stops either the blue repeat symbol or the white repeat symbol on the winning line. This is because it is programmed.

When the player operates the middle stop button 10b at the second stop, the main control unit 100 controls the middle drum 2b to stop based on the sliding piece number data, and stops the bell symbol of RP4 on the winning line. In this case, No. 8 shows a stopped state (see FIG. 72(D)). This is because if the first stop operation is the left stop button 10a (sequential press or scissors press), the main control unit 100 is programmed to give priority to RP4 over other replay combinations and win. be. At this point, only RP4 can be won. When the right stop button 10c is operated at the subsequent third stop, the right drum 2c is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and either the seven symbol of RP4, the red watermelon symbol, or the green watermelon symbol is placed on the winning line. make it stop. In this case, No. The number 2 Seven symbol is shown in a stopped state, and when RP4 wins, the small role clear identification information is displayed in a straight line on the diagonal line downward to the right of the symbol display window (see FIG. 72(E)). FIG. 72(F) shows a case where the player operates the right stop button 10c (presses the scissors) at the second stop and stops the RP4 symbol preferentially, similar to the sequential press, and the RP4 is When a prize is won, the bell symbol (small role clear identification information) is displayed in a straight line in the symbol display window (see FIG. 72(E)).

FIG. 73 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window portion in chronological order.

Since FIG. 73(A) is in exactly the same state as FIG. 72(A), the description will be used here.

The main control unit 100 controls whether the player reaches No. 1 at the first stop. When the middle stop button 10b is operated (operated according to a specific operating procedure) at the timing when the seven symbol 2 can be pulled in (see Fig. 73 (B)), the middle drum 2b is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and RP14 and RP15 are The common seven symbols are stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 73(C)). The main control unit 100 controls the number when the player presses the left stop button 10a at the second stop. If you operate it at the timing to pull in the 7 symbol of 2 (operate according to the prescribed operating procedure. Left 2nd), the middle drum 2b will be stopped based on the sliding frame number data, and the 7 symbol common to RP14 and RP15 will be placed on the winning line. (See FIG. 73(D)). Then, the main control unit 100 causes the player to press the right stop button 10c at the third stop. If you operate it at the timing to draw in the 7 symbol of 2 (operate according to the predetermined operating procedure. Right 3rd), the middle drum 2b will be stopped based on the sliding piece number data, the 7 symbol of RP14 will be stopped on the winning line, and the 7 symbol of RP14 will be stopped on the winning line. is won (see FIG. 73(E)), but if the third stop operation is performed at a timing when the seven symbol cannot be drawn, the bell symbol is stopped on the winning line and RP15 is won (not shown). On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 73(C), if the left 2nd operation is performed at a timing when the seven symbol cannot be drawn, the bell symbol of RP15 is stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 73(F)). Note that in the state shown in FIG. 73(D), No. 5 or no. Even if the right 3rd operation is performed at the timing when the RP14 BAR symbol can be pulled in, the main control unit 100 does not stop the RP14 BAR symbol on the winning line. The 3rd prize bell symbol is stopped on the winning line. In other words, in the case of Bell Replay 1, if you use a specific operation order (middle left/right order) and you can pull in the seven symbols, three seven symbols will be displayed in a straight line and RP14 will win, but at the third stop, the BAR Even if the symbol can be drawn, RP14 does not win, but RP15 wins. Note that the main control unit 100 allows the player to press the middle stop button 10b at No. 1 at the first stop. If the player operates at a timing when the number 2 Seven symbol cannot be drawn, the middle drum 2b is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and either the blue repeat symbol or the white repeat symbol is stopped on the winning line (not shown). In the subsequent operation, either RP1 or RP2 wins, and a blue repeat symbol or a white repeat symbol (replay combination clear identification information) is displayed in a straight line in the middle of the symbol display window or in a straight line diagonally upward to the right (not shown). In addition, when the 2nd right operation is performed in the state of Fig. 73 (C), the bell symbol stops, and when the third stop operation is performed, the bell symbol stops and RP15 is won (the stop display mode is "Bell symbol, Seven symbol , bell pattern).

FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window portion in chronological order.

Since FIG. 74(A) is in exactly the same state as FIG. 72(A), the explanation will be used here.

The main control unit 100 controls whether the player reaches No. 1 at the first stop. When the right stop button 10c is operated at the timing when the blank symbol 14 is located on the winning line (see Fig. 74 (B)), the right drum 2c is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and the red watermelon symbol RP2 is won. It is stopped on the line (see FIG. 74(C)). In this state, the white repeat symbol stops at the top, and it is already impossible to win any prize other than RP2 or RP4. The main control unit 100 controls the number when the player presses the middle stop button 10b at the second stop. If the operation is performed when the top spot symbol No. 11 is located on the winning line, the middle drum 2b is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and 4 frames are slid to win the No. The blue repeat symbol 7 is stopped on the winning line (see Figure 74(D)). In this case, No. Although it is possible to stop the 10 blue rep symbols, the stop control is performed so that the amount of slippage is increased intentionally. In this state, the replay symbols are full, but it is already impossible to win except for RP2. Furthermore, the player presses the left stop button 10a at the third stop. When operated when the 14th red watermelon symbol is located on the winning line, the left drum 2a is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and 4 frames are slid and the No. 1 is placed on the winning line. Stop 10 bell symbols on the winning line. When RP2 wins, a blue repeat symbol or a white repeat symbol (replay combination clear identification information) is displayed in a straight line diagonally upward to the right of the symbol display window (see FIG. 74(E)). FIG. 74(F) shows a case where the player operates the left stop button 10a at the same timing in the second stop, and in any case, RP2 is sure to win. However, depending on the operation timing of the right stop button 10c, RP1 (see Figure 69 (E)) or RP3 (see Figure 71 (E)) will win, and the blue reply symbol or white reply symbol (replay role clear identification information) will be the symbol. displayed in a straight line on the display window.

FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window portion in chronological order.

The main control unit 100 sets flags RP1 to RP3, RP5, RP14, and RP15 when Bell Replay 2 shown in FIG. 64 is won by random number lottery in a game in which a bonus combination is internally won. Therefore, as a result, seven internal winning states, namely the bonus flag, RP1 to RP3, RP5, RP14 and RP15 flags, are set. In addition, the main control unit 100 performs control to prioritize replay symbols over bonus symbols and draw them onto the winning line and stop them, and since any replay symbol always wins, the bonus symbol wins when the replay symbol is won. There's nothing to do.

Similar to the Bell Replay 1, the main control unit 100 controls the sliding frame based on the stored stop control data, operation procedure, and operation position (operation timing) until all the drums of the drum unit 2 rotate at a constant speed. Create a number table. The main control unit 100 controls the player to operate the left stop button 10a at the first stop (operate or operate according to a predetermined operating procedure) while all the drums of the drum unit 2 are rotating (see FIG. 75(A)). 1st operation on the left) (see Fig. 75(B)), the left drum 2a is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and either the blue repeat symbol or the white repeat symbol is stopped on the winning line (the bell symbol is displayed on the upper row). is displayed). In this case, the first stop operation is the left stop button 10a (left 1st), and the No. When 15 bell symbols are operated on the winning line, slide 4 frames and win RP1 No. This shows that the 11 white repeat symbols are stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 75(C)). This is because the main control unit 100 is programmed to perform stop control so that if the first stop operation is the left stop button 10a and the left drum 2a stops first, RP5 wins. At this point, only RP1 or RP5 can win, but as will be described later, RP1 is controlled to stop so that it does not win with the left 1st operation.

When the player operates the middle stop button 10b at the second stop, the main control unit 100 controls the middle drum 2b to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and moves either the red watermelon symbol or the green watermelon symbol of RP5 to the winning line. Stop at the top. In this case, No. The red watermelon pattern 9 is shown in a stopped state (see FIG. 75(D)). When the right stop button 10c is operated at the subsequent third stop, the right drum 2c is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and either the top spot symbol or the blank symbol of RP5 is stopped on the winning line. In this case, No. The blank symbol 4 shows a stopped state, and when RP5 wins, the bell symbol (minor role explicit identification information) is displayed in a straight line in the upper row of the symbol display window (see FIG. 75(E)). FIG. 75(F) shows a case where the player operates the right stop button 10c (presses the scissors) at the second stop and stops in the same way, and when RP5 wins, the bell symbol (minor role explicit identification information ) are displayed in a straight line on the upper horizontal line of the symbol display window (see FIG. 75(E)).

The main control unit 100 will win RP14 when the Bell Replay 2 is internally won, and if you operate the 7 symbol on the 1st center, the 7 symbol on the left 2nd, and the BAR symbol on the 3rd right, the main control unit 100 will win the RP14 and make the horizontal line in the center of the symbol display window. (Seven pattern, Seven pattern, BAR pattern) is displayed, while No. Even if the right 3rd operation is performed at the timing when the 7R symbol of 2 is drawn, the 7 symbol of RP14 does not stop on the winning line and the No. The 3rd prize bell symbol is stopped on the winning line. If you miss it, another symbol RP15 (seven symbol, seven symbol, bell symbol), RP1 or RP2 will be awarded. When the right 1st stop operation is performed, RP3 is won and the replay winning combination explicit identification information (replay winning combination identification information) is displayed in a straight line in the symbol display window. If Bell Replay 2 or Bell Replay 1 is won internally during AT (during a special game where the assist function is activated), the order of stop operations for right 1st (right (middle or right-middle-left). This solves the problem that the bell symbols (minor role explicit identification information) are displayed in a straight line even though no medals are paid out, and the player does not feel uncomfortable. In other words, the feature of the present invention is that when a bell replay role is internally won, the bell symbol (minor role explicit identification information) is displayed in a straight line in the symbol display window in the left 1st, while the bell symbol is displayed in the symbol display window in other than the left 1st. The points are not displayed in a straight line. In addition, for both the middle 1st and the right 1st, replay role explicit identification information (replay role explicit identification information) can be displayed in a straight line on the symbol display window.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure up to the start of ART.

The player plays the game (normal game and special game) in a high probability replay state where the bonus winning combination (RBB or CBB) explained in FIG. Then, the winning operation procedure that is advantageous to the player is notified.). On the other hand, when a player actually wins a bonus role in a game hall and plays a bonus game (RBB game or CBB game)
Since it is not assumed that the game will be played (game), and the game is in a penalty state, the explanation will be omitted.

When the power is turned on and the stage settings are made to start the normal game ("game start" in the figure), the sub-control unit 160 determines either the normal mode (step S500) or the high probability mode (step S510) by lottery. . The sub-control unit 160 executes an AT (assist time, third bonus or pseudo-bonus) lottery when a specific trigger combination is internally won in the random number lottery performed by the main control unit 100 in step S520. If the AT lottery has not been won in step S522, the sub-control unit 160 performs a mode transition lottery in step S524, and proceeds to step S500 or step S510. For example, if a rare small winning combination (cherry, watermelon, chance, etc.) is won as a specific opportunity winning combination, a lottery will be drawn to shift to the high probability mode, while if a replay is won, a lottery will be drawn to shift to the normal mode. In this high probability mode, the sub-control unit 160 selects one from a plurality of lottery tables with different AT winning probabilities, and has a high probability of winning AT about 10 to 100 times higher than in the normal mode. let As a relief measure, even if the number of completed games reaches the ceiling number of games, the AT is forcibly won.

In this normal game, when an operation other than the left 1st operation is performed, the sub-control unit 160 generates a warning sound to notify the player that this is a penalty operation. This penalty operation is executed when a push-order minor winning combination is internally won, and if a "target small winning combination" that constitutes a push-order minor winning combination that should not have won a prize wins, the AT lottery will not be held for a predetermined number of games, etc. give a big penalty. In that case, even if you draw a rare small prize during the penalty period, you will not be able to receive the AT lottery and will not receive any benefits in the game, so the player will perform the left 1st operation (operate according to a specific procedure) with a low probability of winning. It is. Therefore, when normal replay 1 or normal replay 2 is internally won, the replay combination is won by the left 1st operation, and the replay combination explicit identification information is displayed in a straight line in the symbol display window. Then, the main control unit 100 immediately lights up all (three) input coin count LEDs 4a, and when the player operates the start lever, a winning combination is drawn and the game starts (however, 4.1 seconds elapse between games). Spin the reels as a requirement). On the other hand, if Bell Replay 1 or Bell Replay 2 is internally won, the main control unit 100 will cause the Replay to win with the left 1st operation and the bell symbol (minor role explicit identification information) to be displayed in a straight line in the symbol display window. calls the bell replay processing subroutine.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the bell replay processing subroutine.

When the main control unit 100 calls this subroutine, it starts measuring time in step S600 (for example, starts a 20-second timer). The main control unit 100 determines whether or not the start lever 9 has been operated in step S610, and if it has been operated, it ends the time measurement in step S640 and proceeds to step S650, whereas if it has not been operated, it proceeds to step S620. Transition. The main control unit 100 determines whether or not the power has been turned on in step S620, and if it has been turned on, it ends the time measurement in step S640 and proceeds to step S650, whereas if it has not been turned on, it moves to step S630. This "insertion" means directly putting the game medal itself into the medal slot, or operating the max bet button 8 (it may also be the 1 BET button operation).

The main control unit 100 determines whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed in step S630, and if the predetermined time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S610, whereas if the predetermined time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S650. When the main control unit 100 moves to step S650, it lights up all (three) input sheet count LEDs 4a, and ends this subroutine. In other words, when Bell Replay 1 or Bell Replay 2 wins and the bell symbols (minor role clear identification information) are displayed in a straight line in the symbol display window, the number of inserted coins LED 4a is turned on after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. The time measurement is canceled by a closing operation or a closing operation before the time measurement. Even if the max bet button 8 is operated, the stored amount displayed by the stored medal number display LED 4b does not decrease. Further, when medals are directly inserted by the inserting operation, the inserted quantity is added to the accumulated quantity displayed by the medal accumulated quantity display LED 4b. When the bell symbol (minor role clear identification information) is displayed in a straight line in the symbol display window due to a winning in Bell Replay, the player will be under the illusion that a minor role has been won and will operate the max bet button 8 using the familiar procedure. , processing in this way will cause less discomfort. Similarly, if the start lever 9 is operated before the predetermined time is counted, the timer is canceled and the input sheet number LED 4a is turned on. The reason why the bell replay is provided is that the normal game is in a high probability replay state and replays are frequently won, so that it gives the player the impression that he has won a small winning combination of 3 coins.

To continue the explanation by returning to FIG. 76, when the sub-control unit 160 wins the AT lottery in step S522, the sub-control unit 160 performs an AT type lottery (step S526) to determine a pseudo-big bonus or a pseudo-regular bonus. A lottery for the number of AT stocks (step S528) and a lottery for the number of portent games (step S530) are performed. This number of precursor games is the number of games required to notify the player of the winning of AT, and the transition to the precursor mode in step S532 continues the extremely hot performance for about 8 to 32 games. The sub-control unit 160 performs an AT winning confirmation effect (for example, a display effect of "bonus confirmed") in step S534, and plays a preparatory game until the replay combination is won and a bonus symbol is displayed (step S536). For example, if a pseudo big bonus is determined by the AT type lottery, the bonus confirmation display (WIN display) will continue, and if Normal Replay 1 or Bell Replay 1 is won, the operation order of the middle left and right and aim for "777". indicate. When the player aims at the seven symbol with the middle first, the seven symbol with the second left, and the seven symbol with the right third, and 777 is displayed, the process moves to step S538 and the AT game is started. Similarly, in the case of a pseudo-regular bonus, if the normal replay 2 or the bell replay 2 is won, the operation order of the middle left and right and the aim for "77 BAR" are displayed. When the player aims at the 7 symbol with the middle 1st, the 7 symbol with the 2nd left, and the BAR symbol with the 3rd right, and 77 BAR is displayed, the process moves to step S538 and the AT game is started. However, even if the push order is correct, if the operation timing is wrong, a replay combination with another symbol will be won and "777" or "77BAR" will not be displayed, but if the push order is correct, the AT game will start. do.

The sub-control unit 160 performs an additional lottery each time a specific trigger winning combination that triggers an additional lottery is internally won in step S540, and calculates the number of AT additional winnings (number of games, number of coins, number of wins of small winnings in push order, etc.). Alternatively, the stock number (number of sets, number of loops, etc.) is displayed on the display presentation device 11. Naturally, the sub-control unit 160 adds the additional number to the remaining number and displays it on the display effect device 11 or stores it in the RAM.

Specific triggers include, for example, single cherry, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, strong chance, and weak chance. The expected number of additional games (expected value) is an average of 100 games for single cherry, an average of 50 games for strong cherry, an average of 20 games for weak cherry, an average of 75 games for strong watermelon, an average of 10 games for weak watermelon, and an average of strong chance. There are 200 games and an average of 30 games with weak chances, and the sub-control unit 160 draws random numbers using the bonus lottery table corresponding to each specific trigger combination to determine the bonus number. For the single cherry addition lottery table, 500 games will be 5%, 200 games will be 5%, 100 games will be 50%, 50 games will be 30%, and 0 games (loss) will be 10%. The average value added is 100 games. For example, if you generate a random number from 0 to 99, the extracted random number is 0 to 9, 0 games (lose), 10 to 59, 100 games, 60 to 89, 50 games, 90 to 94, 200 games, 95 to 99. There will be 500 games to win. In addition, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, strong chance, weak chance, etc. are additional lottery tables with the same structure, and the only difference is the allocation, the number of winning games, and the expected number of additional games, so the explanation will be omitted. do.

When the sub-control unit 160 moves to step S544, it determines whether the special addition condition is satisfied. For example, when a specific opportunity combination is won, a special bonus lottery is executed, and if the winning is achieved, the condition is satisfied. This condition also holds true when the protagonist wins in a battle between the protagonist and an enemy character, with the opponent's HP (hit points) becoming zero and the protagonist winning. When the special add-on condition is satisfied in step S544, the sub-control unit 160 moves to step S546 and selects one from a plurality of special add-on zones. For example, special bonus zone A is a zone where the bonus lottery is held for only 3 games (expected bonus value is about 30), special bonus zone B is a zone where the bonus lottery is held for 5 games only (expected bonus value is about 50), and special bonus zone C. is a zone (the expected value of addition is approximately 100) where additional drawings are held only during the game until the winnings are missed in the continuous drawing. The value won in this additional lottery (number of games, number of navigations, number of paid out coins, etc.) is the numerical value for activating the assist function, and similarly to the additional lottery mentioned above, the additional number is added to the remaining number and the display effect device 11 or stored in RAM.

In particular, when special addition zone D is selected, press the special button 14 repeatedly and perform a continuous lottery (flat tire lottery or fall lottery) and an additional lottery for each operation, and you will be excluded from the continuous lottery (flat tire lottery). The total value of the winning value (or winning the falling lottery) and the value won in the additional lottery is used as the additional number for activating the assist function, and this additional number is added to the remaining number and displayed on the display effect device 11 and stored in the RAM. Remember.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a processing subroutine for special additional zone D. 79 and 80 are flowcharts showing the freeze effect processing subroutine.

When moving to the special addition zone D in step S546, the sub-control unit 160 selects either the freeze effect 1 in which the 7 blue symbols are aligned in a straight line depending on the order of the presses, or the freeze effect 2 in which the 7 red symbols are aligned in a straight line depending on the order of the presses. It is determined by a lottery whether or not to do so (step S700). In the case of the red 7 symbol, the special add-on game is played only once, but in the case of the blue 7 symbol, the special add-on game is played twice or more (multiple times), which is advantageous for the player. The winning ratio of blue 7 symbols is approximately 20%, and the blue 7 symbols are matched about once every five times.

When the sub-control unit 160 moves to step S710, it waits for notification from the main control unit 100 that the freeze triggers GRP (Group Replay) 1 to GRP7 have been won, and if none of the group replays have been won, the process proceeds to step S715. After performing normal processing, the process returns to step S710 and loops. For example, the normal process of step S715 is a process of activating the assist function and notifying the winning operation order when the push order minor combination is won. In other words, steps S710 and S715 can be said to be a standby state until the start of the special add-on game.

Group replay is an upper blue 7 replay in which the blue 7 symbols are displayed in a straight line horizontally at the top of the display window, and a blue 7 symbol is displayed in a straight line at the top right of the display window (lower blue 7, middle blue 7, upper blue 7). There are multiple replay roles, such as the upper right blue 7 replay, the middle red 7 replay where the red 7 symbols are displayed in a straight line horizontally in the middle of the display window, and the lower normal replay where the normal replay symbols are displayed in a horizontal straight line at the bottom of the display window. These are replay combinations that are won at the same time, and the types and combinations of replay combinations that are internally won at the same time are different for each group replay. Due to this difference, the replay that is displayed when winning a prize is made different depending on the order in which the buttons are pressed.

Referring to FIG. 79, when the start operation of the symbol display game is performed in step S800, the main control unit 100 executes a winning combination (symbol lottery) and notifies the sub-control unit 160 of the internal winning combination (selection result). do. Note that various information is appropriately transmitted from the main control unit 100 to the sub-control unit 160,
Although the gaming status and commands can be directly transmitted, conversely, information cannot be directly transmitted from the sub-control section 160 to the main control section 100. In other words, only one-way communication from the main control section 100 to the sub-control section 160 is allowed, and two-way communication is not possible. In other words, the main control means is configured to transmit information to the sub control means in one direction, but not to receive information from the sub control means.

The main control unit 100 determines in step S810 that any of the freeze trigger roles GRP (Group Replay) 1 to GRP7 has been won, and if it is the freeze trigger role, the process moves to step S815, whereas if it is the freeze trigger role, the main control unit 100 For example, the process moves to step S860, and normal processing such as stop control and medal payout is executed.

Referring to FIG. 78, when the sub-control unit 160 receives a notification from the main control unit 100 in step S710 that the freeze trigger (in this case, GRP1) has been won, the sub-control unit 160 proceeds to step S720 with a winning symbol (a symbol displayed in a straight line). ), and if it is a blue 7 symbol, the process moves to step S730 to notify the display operation order of the blue 7 pattern, while if it is a red 7 pattern, the process moves to step S750 and the display operation order of the red 7 pattern is notified. Notify. When the sub-control unit 160 displays the red 7 symbol after the end of the next game (next symbol display game), the sub-control unit 160 moves to step S760 and executes the special add-on game only once. On the other hand, if the blue 7 symbol is displayed, the process moves to step S740, and the special add-on game is played at least once and as many times as the designated number of additions (1 to 255 times) notified from the main control unit 100. Execute. Therefore, in the case of blue 7 symbols, the minimum number of times is 2 or more, and the maximum is 256 times. For example, assuming 5 times, after the first symbol display game ends, the first special add-on game is executed, after the second symbol display game ends, the second special add-on game is executed, and so on. After the end of the fifth symbol display game, the fifth special add-on game is executed. In other words, five consecutive games and five special add-on games are played. Note that in order to cause the main control unit 100 to perform a reel effect in a freeze state (a state that delays the progress of the game) from the start of the next game until the stop button unit 10 can be operated normally, the main control unit 100 is Although the specified number of additions is determined and notified, the special addition game may simply be executed the number of times determined by the sub-control unit 160.

Referring to FIG. 79, when the main control unit 100 moves to step S815, it determines whether or not the operation is in the freeze procedure corresponding to the freeze trigger, and if it is the freeze procedure, the main control unit 100 moves to step S820. Otherwise, the process moves to step S860. As will be described later, the freezing procedure of GRP1 is 1st on the right, 7 blue symbols are aligned on the middle 2nd, and 7 red symbols are aligned on the 2nd left. When proceeding to step S820, the main control unit 100 determines whether a specific external centralized terminal board signal (hereinafter also referred to as "concentrated terminal signal") is ON. This particular convergence signal is a signal indicating that an assist bonus called the third bonus is in progress, and the bell replay winnings in which the small winning clear identification information is displayed in a straight line in the non-AT state (non-assisting state) are In the case of internal winning, if the operation is performed in the order in which re-gaming combination clear identification information is displayed instead of the left 1st, it will turn ON, and if it is operated in the left 1st, it will turn OFF. In other words, this signal is turned ON when the main control unit 100 recognizes that AT is in progress, but is turned OFF when it recognizes that AT is not in progress. If the convergence signal is ON, the main control unit 100 moves to step S830, while if it is OFF, the main control unit 100 moves to step S860. Thereby, even if a freeze trigger is won while a signal indicating a non-AT state is being outputted and the player accidentally operates a stop button in a freeze procedure due to a penalty operation, the main control section 100 does not perform a freeze effect. In other words, the main control unit 100 performs the freeze effect only after the freeze trigger is won while the signal indicating the AT state is being output and the player operates the stop button in the freeze procedure.

When the main control unit 100 moves to step S830, if the blue 7 symbol is displayed (in the case of right 1st, middle 2nd), the main control unit 100 executes delay processing 1 in step S840, while displaying the red 7 symbol. (right 1st, left 2nd), delay processing 2 is executed in step S850. Delay process 1 is relatively long, about 20 seconds, and is provided to notify that a special add-on game will be performed after a freeze effect using the reels is performed at the start of the next game. Delay processing 2 is relatively short, about 5 seconds, and simply announces that a special add-on game will be played at the end of the next game. When these processes are completed, one game ends. Note that even if the blue 7 symbols and red 7 symbols are not displayed in a straight line, as long as the operation order matches, the delay process 1 or the delay process 2 is executed. In other words, the player does not suffer any loss even if he cannot hit the target.

Referring to FIG. 80, when the next game is started by the start operation and the process moves to step S900, the main control unit 100 executes a winning combination (symbol lottery) and transfers the internal winning combination (lottery result) to the sub-control unit 160. In step S910, it is determined whether the start condition for the reel freeze effect is satisfied (that is, the operation has been performed in the order of displaying the blue 7 symbols corresponding to the freeze trigger). If the start conditions are not met, the main control unit 100 moves to step S990 and executes normal processing, while if the start conditions are met, the main control unit 100 moves to step S920 and turns on the performance display LED 4f. Then, the number N of times the blue 7 symbols or red 7 symbols are displayed in a straight line is determined by lottery, and the sub-control unit 160 is notified of the display number N.

The main control unit 100 rotates all the reels in step S930, but this is not regular rotation control but rotation for reel performance. When any of the stop button sections 10 is operated in step S940, the main control section 100 causes the corresponding drum section 2 to pseudo-stop (temporary stop). This pseudo-stop does not completely stop the drum section 2, but continues to slightly move up and down without changing the stopping position. Note that even though at least one reel of the drum section 2 is rotating, if the corresponding stop button section is not operated, the one rotating reel will stop after a predetermined period of time (approximately 20 seconds) has elapsed. Since the reels are stopped sequentially from the left, the drum section 2 pseudo-stops in 60 seconds at maximum. Furthermore, when the two reels are stopped, they are stopped so that the blue 7 symbols or the red 7 symbols are always in a ten-pai state. The main control unit 100 determines whether N is 0 or not in step S950, and if it is 0, in step S980 the main control unit 100 pseudo-stops the last reel at a losing number (non-linear display of 7 symbols) to perform a reel freeze effect. When the performance is finished, the performance display LED 4f is turned off. Then, the process moves to step S990 and normal processing is executed, while if it is not 0, the process moves to step S960. In other words, when N is 0, it means that it has already been displayed N times. However, the state in which the drum section 2 is pseudo-stopped (temporarily stopped) may be set as a completely stopped state. By lighting up the performance display LED 4f, it is clearly shown to the player that it is a freeze performance using the reels, but when the stop button section 10 is further operated, the corresponding drum section 2 is pseudo-stopped (temporary stop). In this case, the reel freeze effect is recognized by stopping the reel for more than 190 ms after the stop operation. In other words, instead of the usual 5-frame control, the reel slides for 6 frames or more, giving the player a sense of discomfort and appealing to the reel freeze effect.

The main control unit 100 pseudo-stops the blue 7 symbols or the red 7 symbols and displays them in a straight line in step S960, then rotates the reels upward to display a preparation symbol, and in step S970, the start lever 9 is operated or It is determined whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed (approximately 10 seconds), and the process loops until the condition is satisfied. When this start condition is satisfied, N-1 is calculated in step S975, and this calculation result is used as a new N to proceed to step S920. Transition.

FIGS. 81 to 87 are schematic diagrams chronologically showing the pattern display state of the window. Group Replay 1 to Group Replay 7 will be described in detail using these figures.

Referring to FIG. 81, when Group Replay 1 (GRP1) is internally won, at least the upper blue 7 replays, middle red 7 replays, lower normal replays, and a plurality of other replays are simultaneously won. The main control unit 100 controls the main control unit 100 so that when all the drums of the drum unit 2 are rotating (see FIG. 81(A)), the player aims at the 7 blue symbols and the 7 red symbols on each drum, and when the player stops at the first stop. When the right stop button 10c and the middle stop button 10b are operated at the second stop, both the blue 7 symbol and the red 7 symbol become tenpai (see FIG. 81 (B1) and FIG. 81 (C1)), so the player can choose which replay to play. It is not possible to determine whether this will win the prize or not. When the player operates the left stop button 10a at the third stop, the upper blue 7 replay wins (see FIG. 81 (D1)). Furthermore, since the winning line is the middle horizontal line, the actual winning symbols will naturally be different. On the other hand, when the player aims at the blue 7 symbols and red 7 symbols on each drum and operates the right stop button 10c at the first stop and the left stop button 10a at the second stop, both the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols become tenpai. (See FIGS. 81(B2) and 81(C2)), and when the middle stop button 10b is operated at the third stop, the middle red 7 replay is won (see FIG. 81(D2)).

Referring to FIG. 82, when Group Replay 2 (GRP2) is internally won, at least the upper right blue 7 replay, the middle red 7 replay, the lower normal replay, and a plurality of other replays are simultaneously won. The main control unit 100 controls the main control unit 100 so that when all the drums of the drum unit 2 are rotating (see FIG. 82(A)), the player aims at the 7 blue symbols and the 7 red symbols on each drum, and when the player stops at the first stop. When the right stop button 10c and the left stop button 10a are operated at the second stop, both the blue 7 symbol and the red 7 symbol become tenpai (see FIG. 82 (B1) and FIG. 82 (C1)), so the player can choose which replay. I can't tell if it will win or not. When the player operates the middle stop button 10b at the third stop, the upper right blue 7 replay wins (see FIG. 82 (D1)). Furthermore, since the winning line is the middle horizontal line, the actual winning symbols will naturally be different. On the other hand, when the player aims at the blue 7 symbols and red 7 symbols on each drum and operates the right stop button 10c at the first stop and the middle stop button 10b at the second stop, both the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols become tenpai. (See FIGS. 82(B2) and 82(C2)), and when the left stop button 10a is operated at the third stop, the middle red 7 replay wins (see FIG. 82(D2)).

Referring to FIG. 83, when Group Replay 3 (GRP3) is internally won, at least the upper blue 7 replays, middle red 7 replays, lower normal replays, and a plurality of other replays are simultaneously won. The main control unit 100 controls the main control unit 100 so that when all the drums of the drum unit 2 are rotating (see FIG. 83(A)), the player aims at the 7 blue symbols and the 7 red symbols on each drum, and when the player stops at the first stop. When the right stop button 10c is operated and the left stop button 10a is operated at the second stop, only the blue 7 symbol is turned on top (see FIG. 83 (B1) and FIG. 83 (C1)). Therefore, when the upper row blue 7 replay wins, the player Can be determined (2 confirmation: confirmed by second operation). When the player operates the middle stop button 10b at the third stop, the upper blue 7 replay wins (see FIG. 83 (D1)). Furthermore, since the winning line is the middle horizontal line, the actual winning symbols will naturally be different. On the other hand, when the player aims at the blue 7 symbols and red 7 symbols on each drum and operates the right stop button 10c at the first stop and the middle stop button 10b at the second stop, both the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols become tenpai. (See FIGS. 83(B2) and 83(C2)), and when the left stop button 10a is operated at the third stop, the middle row red 7 replay wins (see FIG. 83(D2)).

Referring to FIG. 84, when Group Replay 4 (GRP4) is internally won, at least the upper right blue 7 replay, the middle red 7 replay, the lower normal replay, and a plurality of other replays are simultaneously won. The main control unit 100 controls the main control unit 100 so that when all the drums of the drum unit 2 are rotating (see FIG. 84(A)), the player aims at the 7 blue symbols and the 7 red symbols on each drum, and when the player stops at the first stop. When the right stop button 10c is operated and the middle stop button 10b is operated at the second stop, only the blue 7 symbol is made full (see FIG. 84 (B1) and FIG. 84 (C1)), so if the player wins the upper row blue 7 replay, Can be determined (2 confirmation: confirmed by second operation). When the player operates the left stop button 10a at the third stop, the upper blue 7 replay wins (see FIG. 84 (D1)). Furthermore, since the winning line is the middle horizontal line, the actual winning symbols will naturally be different. On the other hand, when the player aims at the blue 7 symbols and red 7 symbols on each drum and operates the right stop button 10c at the first stop and the left stop button 10a at the second stop, both the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols become tenpai. (See FIGS. 84(B2) and 84(C2)), and when the middle stop button 10b is operated at the third stop, the middle red 7 replay wins (see FIG. 84(D2)).

Referring to FIG. 85, when Group Replay 5 (GRP5) is internally won, at least the upper blue 7 replay, the middle red 7 replay, the lower normal replay, and a plurality of other replays are simultaneously won. The main control unit 100 controls the main control unit 100 so that when all the drums of the drum unit 2 are rotating (see FIG. 85(A)), the player aims at the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols on each drum, and when the player stops at the first stop. When the middle stop button 10b and the right stop button 10c are operated at the second stop, both the blue 7 symbol and the red 7 symbol become tenpai (see FIG. 85 (B1) and FIG. 85 (C1)), so the player can choose which replay to play. I can't tell if it will win or not. When the player operates the left stop button 10a at the third stop, the upper blue 7 replay wins (see FIG. 85 (D1)). Furthermore, since the winning line is the middle horizontal line, the actual winning symbols will naturally be different. On the other hand, if the player aims at the blue 7 symbols and red 7 symbols on each drum and operates the left stop button 10a at the first stop and the right stop button 10c at the second stop, only the red 7 symbols will be tenpai (Fig. 85 (B2) and FIG. 85 (C2)), the player can determine if the middle red 7 replay wins (2 certainty: confirmed by the second operation). When the player operates the right stop button 10c at the third stop, the middle row red 7 replay wins (see FIG. 85 (D2)).

Referring to FIG. 86, when Group Replay 6 (GRP6) is internally won, at least the upper blue 7 replay, the middle red 7 replay, the lower normal replay, and a plurality of other replays are simultaneously won. The main control unit 100 controls the main control unit 100 so that when all the drums of the drum unit 2 are rotating (see FIG. 86(A)), the player aims at the 7 blue symbols and the 7 red symbols on each drum, and when the player stops at the first stop. When the middle stop button 10b is operated and the left stop button 10a is operated at the second stop, only the blue 7 symbol is made full (see FIG. 86 (B1) and FIG. 86 (C1)), so if the player wins the upper row blue 7 replay, Can be determined (2 confirmation: confirmed by second operation). When the player operates the right stop button 10c at the third stop, the upper blue 7 replay wins (see FIG. 86 (D1)). Furthermore, since the winning line is the middle horizontal line, the actual winning symbols will naturally be different. On the other hand, when the player aims at the blue 7 symbols and red 7 symbols on each drum and operates the middle stop button 10b at the first stop and the right stop button 10c at the second stop, both the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols become tenpai. Therefore, the player cannot determine which replay will win a prize (see FIGS. 86(B2) and 86(C2)). When the player operates the left stop button 10a at the third stop, the middle row red 7 replay wins (see FIG. 86 (D2)).

Referring to FIG. 87, when Group Replay 7 (GRP7) is internally won, at least the upper right blue 7 Replay, the lower regular replay, and a plurality of other replays are simultaneously won. The main control unit 100 controls the main control unit 100 so that when all the drums of the drum unit 2 are rotating (see FIG. 87(A)), the player aims at the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols on each drum, and when the player stops at the first stop. When the middle stop button 10b is operated, the blue 7 symbol is stopped in the middle row and the red 7 symbol is stopped in the lower row (Fig. 87(B)), so the player can determine that the right-up blue 7 replay wins (1st probability: 1st Confirm with one operation). When the player operates the right stop button 10c at the second stop aiming at the 7 blue symbols and the 7 red symbols on each drum (see FIG. 87 (C1)), or when the player operates the left stop button 10a (see FIG. 87 (C2)). ), when the player makes only the blue 7 symbol tenpai and performs the third stop operation, the right up blue 7 replay wins (see FIG. 87 (D1) and FIG. 87 (D2)). In other operation orders, the lower normal replay or one of the other plurality of replays will definitely win a prize.

FIGS. 88 and 89 are schematic diagrams of the special addition screen.

At the start of the AT bonus in step S538 shown in FIG. 76, the sub-control unit 160 displays the initial assist quantity and the number of acquired coins (0 coins at the start) at the bottom left of the screen, and displays the remaining assist quantity and the number of coins each time the AT game progresses. Update the number of acquired pieces. The assist quantity is the number of games, the number of navigations, the number of coins paid out, etc., and is a numerical value for activating the assist function. for example,
If the assist amount is the number of games, the assist amount is subtracted by 1 when one game is played. If the assist amount is the number of navigations, the assist amount will not change even if one game is played, and the assist amount will be subtracted by 1 when the operation order for winning the push order minor combination is announced. If the assist quantity is the number of coins to be paid out, the assist quantity will not change even if one game is played, and when the order of operations to win the press order minor combination is announced, the number of coins that would originally be paid out will be subtracted from the assist quantity (in other words, Even if the player presses the buttons in the wrong order, it is treated as a win and a payout (in a sense, it is similar to the number of navigation times).

The sub-control unit 160 executes the special add-on game multiple times in step S740 shown in FIG. 78, or executes the special add-on game once in step S760. When performing a plurality of N special add-on games with seven blue symbols, the sub-control unit 160 determines the remaining assist quantity (in this case, it is assumed to be 25 games) and the number of acquired pieces (or the net increase number) before the start. In this case, 353 images (assumed to be 353) are displayed at the bottom left of the screen, and on the right side, the special time and the faces of enemy characters 1 to N are displayed (N is the same number. In the figure, it is abbreviated as numbers 1 to 3). (See Figure 88(A)). In this state, when the predetermined number of three medals is inserted by operating the max bet button 8 and the start lever 9 is operated effectively, the sub-control unit 160 subtracts 1 from the remaining assist quantity and displays 24. , 3 is subtracted from the acquired number to change it to 350 (see FIG. 88(B)). Then, a winning combination is drawn according to the operation timing of the start lever 9, and a variable display game is started in which the reel drum is rotated. When the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches for winning the winning combination is displayed on the display screen, but is omitted in the figure. Since the add-on loop rate is determined based on the result of this combination lottery, the operation of the start lever 9 is a moment when the player must put in a lot of effort. It is assumed that a strong Bell role (a Bell role that can be pushed in any order) with a payout of 15 pieces is internally won. That is, the sub-control unit 160 determines the bonus loop rate and the bonus table based on the winning combination lottery result in the most recent variable display game in which the special bonus lottery (repeat game) is performed.

When the sub-control unit 160 satisfies the starting conditions for the special add-on game (repeated hit game), the sub-control unit 160 enables the operation of the special button 14 (press switch), and determines whether to continue the special add-on game based on the timing of the operation. A continuous lottery (or a falling lottery to determine whether to cancel or not) is executed at an additional loop rate every time the button is pressed. Further, an additional lottery for the amount of assist to be added is performed using the additional table. On the other hand, when the max bet button 8 is operated, the number of additional games is determined based on the loop rate and the expected cancellation value. Note that in the case of cancellation, the same process as when the special button 14 is pressed may be automatically performed. When the special add-on game ends, the sub-control unit 160 displays the total number of AT games obtained by the game number lottery on the display effect device 11, and when the sub-control unit 160 returns to the AT game, the special add-on game is added to the remaining AT game number. The total number of AT games obtained by adding the total number of AT games acquired in the game is set as the new number of AT games. Then, when a press order minor combination is won for a new number of AT games, the operation order of the stop button section 10 is announced.

Specifically, with reference to FIG. 88, when the sub-control unit 160 receives a command indicating that all the reels have stopped due to the operation of the stop switch and the game has ended and a payout number command from the main control unit 100, The number of acquired coins is changed to 365, the special button 14 is made operable, and "hit the special button" or "hit the special button repeatedly" is displayed on the display effect device 11 (see FIG. 88(C)). After that, the player presses the special button 14 nine times in a row, and the number of additional games is 1 for the first time, 3 for the second time, 10 for the third time, 5 for the fourth time, 1 for the fifth time, 1 and 7 for the sixth time. This shows that 50 wins were won on the first try, 1 was won on the 8th time, and 1 was won on the 9th time, for a total of 73 wins. In other words, the additional quantities from the first to the ninth times are accumulated and counted, and the counted value is displayed. Note that FIG. 88(C) shows a state in which the next pressing operation (the tenth pressing operation) has not been performed, and the operation of the special button 14 (pressing switch) is valid.

Referring to FIG. 89, the sub-control unit 160 repeatedly presses the special button 14 in the state shown in FIG. 89(A)). Note that when the max bet button 8 (insertion switch or insertion means) is operated, the final number of addition games is determined and the special addition game (repeat game) is ended. At this time, the sub-control unit 160 temporarily displays the acquired number of additional games "plus 150" on the display screen of the display effect device 11, and adds a new remaining assist quantity (24) to the total additional assist quantity 150 ( 174 is displayed as the total remaining assist quantity (see FIG. 89(A)). In this state, when the predetermined number of three medals is inserted by operating the max bet button 8, the sub-control unit 160 subtracts three medals from the acquired number and changes it to 362 (see FIG. 88(B)). Then, when the start lever 9 is operated effectively and the push-order bell combination that pays out 15 pieces wins, the sub-control unit 160 subtracts 1 from the remaining assist quantity to display 173, and adds 15 to the obtained quantity. Change it to 377. Thereafter, the second special add-on game is executed in the same way, and the button is pressed nine times, indicating that the add-on assist amount is currently 32 (see FIG. 89(B)). In this manner, the sub-control unit 160 repeatedly performs the special add-on game N times at the end of the symbol display game (main game).

In other words, the main control unit 100 starts a symbol display game in which three or more drum units 2 in which 20 to 21 symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are rotated, and draws lots for at least a plurality of small winnings and replay winnings. (You may not win in the lottery for the winning role). When the stop button section 10 provided corresponding to the drum section 2 is operated, the corresponding reel drum is stopped, and a prize is generated according to the display result of the drawn pattern when all the reel drums are stopped. do. Also, there are times when you lose. Note that the main control section 100 may control the sub-control section 160.

There are a plurality of types of small roles in the push order, and there are a plurality of types of push order replay roles in the replay role. The operation order of the stop button unit 10 is notified according to the (press order minor winning combination or pressing order replay winning combination). When the stop button section 10 is operated in the order of operation, the main control section 100 causes the winning combination to be won in the pressing order. The sub-control unit 160 reduces the assist amount when the subtraction condition is satisfied each time the symbol display game is played, each time the navigation is performed, or each time the push order minor combination is won.

The sub-control unit 160 activates the operation of an operation switch (special button 14, max bet button 8, etc.) for performing a special add-on game (repeat-hit game) when a special add-on condition is established during an assist game. The sub-control unit 160 determines the amount of additional assist for each operation of the operation switch in the special additional game, accumulates and counts the determined amount of additional assist, and terminates the special additional assist game at the same operation timing. Decide whether or not. When the special add-on game ends, the sub-control unit 160 adds the assist quantity that exists (remains) at the start of the special add-on game and the add-on assist quantity to obtain a new assist quantity, and adds the extra assist quantity to the determined plurality of special add-on games. Run the game repeatedly. When the sub-control unit 160 finishes a plurality of special add-on games and reduces the assist quantity by advancing the assist game, if at least a new assist quantity exists, the sub-control unit 160 controls the stop switch according to the pressing order. Notify the order of operations.

FIG. 90 is a configuration diagram of the push order minor combinations, and shows that the middle 1st is the correct operation procedure (winning order). The difference from FIG. 62 is that the role name has been changed to a generic (also referred to as "generic information" or "group name") push order bell, and a new push order name has been added. Similarly, FIG. 91 is a configuration diagram of the push order minor combinations, and shows that the right 1st is the correct operation procedure (winning order). The differences from FIG. 63 are the same as FIG. 90. Note that since there are many parts in common with the contents explained in FIGS. 62 and 63, the explanations will be used for overlapping contents.

There are eight types of push order bell combinations, push order bell 1a to push order bell 4b, and their collective name is push order bell (see FIGS. 90 and 91). That is, when the main control unit 100 starts the symbol display game, the main control unit 100 selects one of a plurality of winning combinations (for example, strong cherry, weak cherry, chance, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, bell in any push order, etc.) by drawing a symbol. Among the plurality of combinations, there are eight types (multiple types) of push order bells 1a to 4b. The push order bell 1a shown in FIG. 90 is the push order name (also referred to as "push order name information"), and the role name is the push order bell. When the push order bell 1a is determined, a total of four types of small winning combinations, FR1 (specific small winning combination) with a payout number of 9 pieces and FR2 to FR4 with a payout number of 1 piece each, become available for winning at the same time.

When the start lever 9 is operated in the symbol display game, the main control unit 100 performs a random number lottery, and when one of the eight push order bell combinations is determined, if the notification condition is not satisfied, First win information (role name) indicating that the determined winning combination is a push-order minor winning combination is transmitted. In other words, even if any one of the push-order Bell combinations is won during the normal game in the non-assist state, the main control unit 100 notifies the sub-control unit 160 that the winning combination is the push-order Bell combination. However, information for recognizing (or determining, identifying, understanding, grasping, discriminating, specifying) the order of operations for winning FR1 (specific minor winning combination) is not transmitted. For example, if the main control unit 100 transmits information indicating push order bell 2a or push order bell 2b, which is the name of the push order role in FIG. (correspondence data between the push order winning combination name and the winning order of a specific minor winning combination. For example, the correspondence data between the push order winning combination name and the correct operation order shown in FIG. 90 is stored in the ROM 161), the push order bell 2a or It is recognized that the winning operation order of FR1 is middle → right → left, which is stored in correspondence with the push order bell 2b, but in the non-assist state, the push order bell 2a of the push order name is not transmitted, and the push order of the role name is Send only the bell. However, although it is generally in a non-assist state during the normal game, the notification condition (or If the notification condition) is satisfied, the push order bell 2a of the push order role name may be transmitted.

On the other hand, when any one of the push order bell combinations is won during the special game in the assist state, the main control section 100 causes the sub control section 160 to control the push order bell 2a of the push order winning combination name (the determined winning combination is the push order bell 2a). It is a small winning combination, and information for recognizing the winning order) is notified. When the sub-control unit 160 receives the push order bell 2a (second winning combination information), the sub-control unit 160 causes the display effect device 11 to display the operation order of the stop switches corresponding to the recognized winning order. The main control unit 100 makes sure to win a specific small winning combination when the stop switch is operated in the winning order of the internally won pushing order bell combination (for example, the operating order of the middle right, left, and right of the pushing order bell 2a). On the other hand, if the stop switch is not operated in the winning order, you will either win one of the other three small roles or lose it, but even if you win, you will only receive one payout, so you will end up with a game medal. decreases. Note that the information that the determined winning combination is a push-order minor winning combination is information necessary for the sub-control unit 160 to display the performance image on the display performance device 11, regardless of whether or not it is in the assist state.

That is, the main control unit 100 transmits the name of the winning combination to the sub-control unit 160 when two conditions are satisfied: the winning winning combination is determined and the notification condition is met. When the sub-control unit 160 receives the push order name, it causes the display effect device 11 to display a navigation image (see FIG. 92) based on the middle, right, left operation order recognized from the push order name. Conversely, even if the sub-control unit 160 receives the role name, the role name does not include information for recognizing the winning order, and therefore cannot display the navigation image. As a result, even if the sub-control unit that controls the display of the navigation image is tampered with, the operation order of the pressed combinations cannot be displayed, making it possible to avoid fraudulent winnings.

FIGS. 93 and 94 are flowcharts showing the procedure for transmitting winning combination information. The only difference between FIG. 93 and FIG. 94 is that the processing in step S1010 and step S1015 are performed before and after, but the present invention has a technical idea that includes both cases.

The main control unit 100 determines by itself whether or not to activate the assist function, and performs a winning combination information transmission process during the game main process of step S170 shown in FIG. 22.

The main control unit 100 determines a winning combination by random number lottery in step S1000, and proceeds to step S1010. The main control unit 100 determines whether or not the winning combination is one of the eight types of push-order Bell winning combinations, and the notification condition is satisfied (see steps S1010 and S1015). If these two conditions are satisfied, the main control unit 100 notifies the sub-control unit 160 of the winning combination name (second winning combination information) in step S1020; however, if not, in step S1030 (first winning combination information) is notified to the sub-control unit 160. Upon receiving the name of the winning combination, the sub-control unit 160 causes the display effect device 11 to display the operation order of the stop switches corresponding to the recognized winning order.

When the stop button unit 10 is operated in step S1040, the main control unit 100 stops the corresponding drum unit 2, and in step S1050, all reel drums (left drum 2a, middle drum 2b, and right drum 2c) are stopped. At this time, a winning combination is determined in accordance with the display result of the symbols derived in step S1060, and a medal payout process is executed in accordance with the won minor winning combination in step S1070. In addition, the main control unit 100 always makes the specific small winning combination win when the stop switch is operated in the winning order of the internally won push order bell combination (for example, the operating order of the middle right, left, and right of the push order bell 2a).

FIG. 95 is a configuration diagram of the small winning combination in the push order, and shows that the middle 1st is the correct operation procedure (winning order). The difference from FIG. 90 is that the name of the winning combination to be pressed has been deleted. Similarly, FIG. 96 is a configuration diagram of the small combinations in the pressing order, and shows that the right 1st is the correct operation procedure. The differences from FIG. 91 are the same as FIG. 90. It should be noted that since there are many parts in common with the contents explained in FIGS. 62, 63, 90, and 91, the explanations will be used for overlapping contents.

When the start lever 9 is operated in the symbol display game, the main control unit 100 performs a random number lottery, and when one of the eight push order bell combinations is determined, if the notification condition is not satisfied, First win information (role name) indicating that the determined winning combination is a push-order minor winning combination is transmitted. In other words, even if any one of the push-order Bell combinations is won during the normal game in the non-assist state, the main control unit 100 notifies the sub-control unit 160 that the winning combination is the push-order Bell combination. However, order information for recognizing (or determining, identifying, understanding, grasping, determining, specifying) the order of operations for winning FR1 (specific small winning combination) is not transmitted.

On the other hand, when any one of the push-order Bell combinations is won during the special game in the assist state, the main control unit 100 informs the sub-control unit 160 that the winning combination is the push-order Bell combination and that FR1 (specific small The second winning combination information to which order information for recognizing the order of operations for winning the winning combination (winning combination) is added is notified. Upon receiving the push order bell combination and order information (second combination information), the sub-control unit 160 causes the display production device 11 to display the operation order of the stop switches corresponding to the recognized winning order (see FIG. 92). . The main control unit 100 makes sure to win a specific small winning combination when the stop switch is operated in the winning order of the internally won pushing order bell combination (for example, the operating order of the middle right, left, and right of the pushing order bell 2a). However, if the stop switch is not operated in the winning order, one of the other three small winning combinations will be won or lost, but even if it is won, the payout is only one piece, so the result is a game medal. decreases. Note that the information that the determined winning combination is a push-order minor winning combination is information necessary for the sub-control unit 160 to display the performance image on the display performance device 11, regardless of whether or not it is in the assist state. Since the sub-control unit 160 receives order information corresponding to the push order Bell combination from the main control unit 100, it has the unique effect that it is not necessary to store push order data in the ROM 161.

FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the winning combination information transmission processing procedure.

The main control unit 100 determines by itself whether or not to activate the assist function, and performs a winning combination information transmission process during the game main process of step S170 shown in FIG. 22.

The main control unit 100 determines a winning combination by random number lottery in step S1200, and proceeds to step S1210. The main control unit 100 determines whether or not the winning combination is one of the eight types of push-order Bell winning combinations, and the notification condition is satisfied (see steps S1210 and S1215). If these two conditions are met, the main control unit 100 notifies the sub control unit 160 of the push order bell information and order information (second hand information) of the winning role name in step S1220; In step S1230, the controller 160 notifies the sub-control unit 160 of the pressing order bell information of the role names (first role information). When the sub-control unit 160 receives the push order bell information and the order information, it causes the display effect device 11 to display the operation order of the stop switches corresponding to the winning order recognized based on the order information.

When the stop button unit 10 is operated in step S1240, the main control unit 100 stops the corresponding drum unit 2, and in step S1250, all reel drums (left drum 2a, middle drum 2b, and right drum 2c) are stopped. At this time, the winning combination is determined according to the display result of the symbols derived in step S1260, and the process of paying out medals according to the winning small winning combination is executed in step S1270. In addition, the main control unit 100 always makes the specific small winning combination win when the stop switch is operated in the winning order of the internally won push order bell combination (for example, the operating order of the middle right, left, and right of the push order bell 2a).

FIG. 98 is a front view of the sanding device.

The sand device 300 is generally installed one-to-one on either the right side or the left side of the gaming machine main body 1 (reel type gaming machine main body 1), and is configured to enable two-way communication with the credit control section 165. , connected with a wire harness. Like the main control unit 100 and the sub-control unit 160, the credit control unit 165 is an integrated one-chip microcomputer equipped with a microprocessor with a built-in CPU, and through two-way communication with the sand device 300, cash information, Manage credit information and player-specific information (address, name, age, PIN, phone number, etc.).

Reference numeral 310 denotes a bill insertion section, and currently only 1000 yen bills, 5000 yen bills, and 10,000 yen bills can be inserted. For example, when 10,000 yen in cash is inserted, the data display section 320 displays 100 as the corresponding frequency. Reference numeral 330 denotes an operation unit that performs a switching operation between a mode in which cash is used and a mode in which cards inserted into the card insertion unit 340 are used. The operation unit 330 also includes a 10 key 331 for inputting a password when a membership card is inserted. This membership card stores stored cash information not used for games, stored credit information (stored medal information) and player management information as game value information. By inserting the membership card into the settlement device, cash corresponding to the stored cash information can be settled. Furthermore, not only can the stored credit information be exchanged for prizes corresponding to the stored credit information, but also it is possible to reuse the stored medals to play pachislot games. Naturally, it is also possible to record the stored ball information and play pachinko games.

FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the payment processing procedure.

When the payment button 6 is operated while the game is on standby (see steps S130 to S160 shown in FIG. 22), the main control unit 100 calls this subroutine and checks the gaming mode in step S1300. This game mode is set to either the normal game mode using the current game medals or the credit mode using the sand machine 300 by operating a game mode selection switch in advance on the hall side. The main control unit 100 checks the gaming mode selection switch when the power is turned on, and determines whether or not to set the gaming mode flag. For example, the game mode flag is 0 in the normal game mode, and 1 in the credit mode. The main control unit 100 checks the gaming mode flag in step S1310, and determines that if it is 0, it is the normal gaming mode, and if it is 1, it is the credit mode.

If the main control unit 100 is in the credit mode, it performs credit settlement processing in step S1320, while if it is in the normal game mode, it performs game media payout processing in step S1330. The credit settlement process involves transmitting a settlement process command and currently inserted credit information (number of medals, number of pachinko balls, etc.) to the credit control unit 165. In the game media payout process, the main control unit 100 itself calculates the sum of the number of inserted coins (the number displayed by the number of inserted coins LED 4a) and the number of stored medals (the number displayed by the number of stored medal display LEDs 4b), and calculates the total number of coins inserted by the medal payout device 18 ( This is a process of dispensing medals from the medal hopper 18). However, the main control unit 100 determines whether or not the replay combination has won in step S1340, and if the replay combination has won, the number of inserted coins indicated by the number of inserted coins LED 4a cannot be paid out. Therefore, only the number of stored medals is paid out, and a warning notification command is sent to the sub-control unit 160 in step S1350. When the sub-control unit 160 receives the payout warning notification command when the replay winning combination is won, the sub-control unit 160 causes the display production device 11 to display a warning that "Replay has won. Please play the game." 12, a warning sound or a warning comment to the same effect as "Replay has won. Please play the game." is emitted, and this subroutine ends.

Upon receiving the settlement processing command and the currently input credit information (data 0 to 3), the credit control unit 165 adds up the stored credits (data 0 to 99) displayed by the stored credit display unit. For example, if the credit information is 3 and the stored credit is 35, the total value will be 38. The credit control unit 165 transmits the return command and the total credit value to the sanding device 300.

When the sand machine 300 receives gaming value data corresponding to a total of 35 credits from the credit control unit 165, it stores the balance information of the inserted cash and the gaming value data in an information recording medium such as a built-in membership card or visitor card. The addition is recorded and the card is discharged from the card insertion section 340 to the outside of the sanding device. For example, if the cash balance displayed by the sand device 300 is 8,000 yen, and the cash balance of the membership card is 3,000 yen and 1,210 accumulated medals (credits) are recorded, the new cash balance is 11,000 yen and a new The stored medals are recorded as 1248 medals and are discharged from the sanding device.

FIG. 100 is a block diagram of the control circuit system of the reel-type gaming machine.

The difference from FIG. 5 is that only electronic data credits are used for the pachislot game, and no game medals (or game media such as pachinko balls) are used, so the medal detection sensor 130 and the medal payout device 18 are eliminated. This is the point. Further, as mechanical components, a medal sorting device, a medal slot 5, a receiving tray 15, a medal passage, etc. are not required. Therefore, the game mode selection switch described with reference to FIG. 99 is not provided either. Furthermore, in place of the payment button 190, a return button (described later) is provided, and when the return button is operated, a return signal (return pulse) is input from the credit control section 165 to the main control section 100. The credit display section corresponds to the medal storage number display LED 4b, and the credit control section 165 performs display control.

FIG. 101 is a schematic diagram of a display section and an operation section.

FIG. 101(A) shows the cash frequency display section 321 and credit frequency display section 322 included in the data display section 320 of the sand machine 300, as well as the return button 332, switch button 333, and payout button 334 included in the operation section 330. It shows. The cash count display section 321 consists of three 7-segment displays, and the credit count display section 322 consists of five. When a 10,000 yen bill is inserted into the bill insertion section 310 in FIG. 98, the cash count display section 321 displays 100. That is, 1 degree corresponds to 100 yen. When the return button 332 included in the operation unit 330 is operated in this state, the visitor card with 100 degrees recorded as balance information is returned from the card insertion unit 340. When this visitor card is inserted into the card insertion section 340 again, the same situation will occur and 100 games will be possible. Note that, as shown in FIG. 101(D), the 7-segment display is filled in black when it is on, and when it is white, it is off.

When you insert your membership card into the card insertion section 340, you will be asked to enter your 4-digit PIN. If the PIN you entered using the 10 key 331 is correct, the balance information recorded on your membership card will be displayed on the cash count display section. 321. When the switching button 333 is operated once in this state, the remaining credit information recorded on the membership card is displayed on the credit degree display section 322. If the user repeats the operation of the switching button 332 again, the display of the remaining credit information and the balance information will be switched alternately with each operation. For example, assuming that the balance information recorded on the membership card is 6,000 yen, a 1,000 yen bill can be inserted into the bill insertion section 310 and the balance information is updated to 7,000 yen. On the other hand, when the balance information is 6,000 yen, additional 5,000 yen bills and 10,000 yen bills cannot be inserted. The reason for this is that the maximum balance information that can be recorded on the membership card is 10,000 yen (predetermined amount), and the total amount exceeds the predetermined amount. Similarly, when you insert 10,000 yen in cash into the bill insertion section 310 and the balance is 6,000 yen, you can insert a membership card with recorded balance information of 4,000 yen or less, but a membership card with balance information of more than 4,000 yen. cannot be inserted.

In other words, when cash is inserted into the bill insertion section 310 with a membership card inserted, the sanding device 300 detects the type of bill (any type of 1000 yen bill, 5000 yen bill, or 10,000 yen bill). Recognize. If the total of the balance information recorded by the membership card and the recognized cash is less than 10,000 yen (predetermined amount), cash is accepted and the total amount is displayed on the cash frequency display section 321, but cash is not accepted. If there is not, the cash is discharged from the bill insertion section 310. Conversely, when the membership card containing cash is inserted into the card insertion section 340, the sandwich device 300 recognizes the balance information recorded on the membership card. If the total of the cash balance and the recognized membership card balance information is less than 10,000 yen (predetermined amount), the membership card is accepted and the total amount is displayed on the cash frequency display section 321, but the membership card is not accepted. In this case, the cash is discharged from the card insertion section 340.

FIG. 101(B) is a schematic diagram of the credit display section.

Reference numeral 169 denotes a credit display section, which corresponds to the conventional medal storage number display LED 4b and is arranged in the display LED block 4. Similar to the credit score display section 322 of the sand device 300, it is composed of five 7-segment displays, and can display the credit score from 0 to 99999. However, even if the number of credits is exceeded, the number of credits is memorized, so it is possible to play games or exchange them for prizes. The card balance display section 50 is composed of three 7-segment displays, and is provided at the location where the medal insertion section 5 was placed. The card balance display section, like the cash count display section 321, displays the inserted cash as balance information (100 yen is one count). For example, when a 10,000 yen bill is inserted into the banknote insertion section 310 (see FIG. 98), the card balance display section 50 displays 100, and when the lending button 51 is operated, 90, which is the equivalent of 1000 yen minus 10 degrees, is displayed. However, the credit frequency display section 322 displays 50. In other words, 1 credit corresponds to 0.2 degrees and 20 yen in cash. If you operate the return button 52 (corresponding to the conventional payment button 6), the cash balance will be 90 degrees (cash information 900).
0 yen) and a credit balance (accumulated credit) of 50 is recorded on the visitor card, which is returned from the card insertion section 340. Note that even if the return button 332 is operated, the visitor card with the same information recorded thereon is returned.

102 to 105 are schematic diagrams of the display section.

When the player inserts his membership card into the card insertion section 340 of the sandwich machine 300, he is asked to enter a four-digit PIN number, and if the PIN number entered by operating the 10 key 331 is correct, it is recorded on the membership card. The balance information is displayed on the cash count display section 321 (see FIG. 102(A)). It is assumed that 8000 yen is recorded as balance information and 12345 (corresponding to 12345 medals at present) is recorded as remaining credit information on the membership card.

The sanding device 300 reads the balance information and displays 80 on the cash count display section 321, displays ----- (5 bars) on the credit count display section 322, and also displays the cash mode command and balance information. Send. When the credit control unit 165 receives the cash mode command and balance information from the sandwich device 300, it recognizes that the mode uses cash and the balance is 80 degrees, and displays 80 on the card balance display unit 50. When the player operates the payout button 334 in this state, the sand machine 300 transmits a payout command to the credit control unit 165. After authentication through mutual communication (confirming that it is normal or that there is no abnormality), the sand device 300 displays 70 on the cash count display section 321, and the credit control section 165 displays the credit count of 50 and the card on the credit display section 169. The cash count 70 is displayed on the balance display section 50 (see FIG. 102(B)). Similarly, when the player operates the lending button 51 in the state shown in FIG. Then, authentication is performed through mutual communication, and the same display as in FIG. 102(B) is performed.

When the player operates the switching button 333 in the state shown in FIG. 3 bars) and sends a credit mode command. When the credit control unit 165 receives the credit mode command from the sand device 300, the credit display unit 169 remains at 0, and the card balance display unit 50 displays Crt (abbreviation of credit), which means a mode in which credit is used. (See FIG. 103(A)). When the player operates the payout button 334 or the loan button 51 in this state, the player is authenticated through mutual communication (communication including transmission and reception of payout commands or lending commands), and the credit count 50, which is the minimum unit of payout credits, is displayed on the credit display. 169. The credit frequency display section 322 displays 12295, which is the value obtained by subtracting 50 from 12345 (see FIG. 103(B)). In other words, 50 credit points are paid out to the credit control unit 165 from the sand device 300 at any time with one payout operation or lending operation. However, if the credit display section 169 is displaying even one credit, the credit may not be dispensed even if the dispensing or lending operation is performed. That is, only when the credit display section 169 is displaying 0 credits, the minimum unit of 50 credits is paid out.

In the state of FIG. 102(B) or FIG. 103(B), the credit control unit 165 changes the state in which the data input circuit 166 inputs data 00 to the state in which it inputs data 11 indicating the number of credits of 3 or more. do. When the max bet button 8 is operated in this state (three inserted coins LEDs 4a are off and the number of bets has not been set), the main control unit 100 lights up three inserted coins LEDs 4a and reduces the amount of credits by 3. Input data indicating that the bet amount has been inserted is output to the credit control unit 165. The credit control unit 165 causes the credit display unit 169 (storage credit display unit) to display 47, which is the value obtained by subtracting the credit 3 (see FIGS. 104(A) and 104(B)). In this state, the player presses the return button 52
(Credit return switch) or when the return button 332 is operated, the credit control unit 165 receives a signal from the return button sensor 168 and causes the data input circuit 166 to input a return signal by one pulse. When the main control unit 100 receives a return signal from the data input circuit 166 by operating the return button 52 in a state in which a predetermined number of bets of three coins is set for one game and the game is ready to start, the main control unit 100 receives a return signal from the data input circuit 166. , transmits bet number data indicating the bet number of 3 to the credit control unit 165.

Upon receiving this bet number data, the credit control unit 165 transmits return credit information (gaming value) indicating that the return credit is 50 (value calculated by 47+3) to the sand machine 300. Note that the data indicating 47 and the data indicating 3 may be transmitted as they are. The sanding device 300 adds 50 returned credits to the membership card or the like, records the number of cash balances and the number of credit balances, and discharges the card. In the case of FIG. 104(A), a cash balance of 70 degrees and a credit balance of 12395 (a value obtained by calculating 12345+50) are recorded on the ejected member card or the like. In addition, in the case of FIG. 104(B), a cash balance of 80 degrees and a credit balance of 12345 (value calculated by calculating 12295+50) are recorded on the ejected member card, etc. (that is, the information is exactly the same as the original recorded information). (equivalent to true and unchanged). FIG. 105 shows the display state after ejecting the membership card, etc., where the cash count display section 321, credit count display section 322, and card balance display section 50 all display "-", and the credit display section 169 displays "-". 0'' is displayed, and all three input sheet number LEDs 4a are turned off. Note that when the player operates the return button 52 in a state where the replay role (replay role) has been won and the next game can be executed, the main control unit 100 transmits the number of bets data indicating the number of bets to be 0. However, the credit control unit 165 transmits return credit information (gaming value) indicating that the number of returned credits is 47 to the sand machine 300. The sanding device 300 adds 47 returned credits to the membership card or the like, records the remaining cash amount and the remaining credit amount, and discharges the card. The main control unit 100 outputs a warning command to the sub control unit 160 since replaying is possible. The sub-control unit 160 causes the display effect device 11 to display a warning screen, and causes the speaker unit 12 to generate a warning sound to inform the player that it is possible to play again.

As another embodiment, when the player operates the return button 52 or the return button 332 in the state shown in FIG. 104(A), the state shown in FIG. 102(B) is returned by returning three bets in the first operation. , the state shown in FIG. 105 may be achieved in the second operation. Similarly, if the player operates the return button 52 or the return button 332 in the state shown in FIG. 104(B), the state shown in FIG. 103(B) is achieved by returning three bets in the first operation, The state shown in FIG. 105 may be obtained by the second operation. That is, when the credit control unit 165 receives information from the main control unit 100 that the number of returned bets is 0 by operating any return button, the credit control unit 165 records the cash balance number and the credit balance number in the sand device 300 on the member card, etc. and drain it.

FIG. 106 is a drum symbol arrangement table. The symbol combination display determination diagram is similar to FIG. 51, so the explanation will be used here.

On each of the left drum 2a, the middle drum 2b, and the right drum 2c, a drum band (not shown) on which a left drum pattern, a middle drum pattern, and a right drum pattern are drawn is arranged so that it goes around the outer periphery of each drum. It is attached to.

There are 21 symbols drawn in different rows on each belt, and the symbols that activate the Big Bonus combination (Class 1 role continuous activation device, hereinafter referred to as ``RBB'') are ``Blue 7, Blue 7''. , Blue 7'', the symbol that activates Regular Bonus Role 1 (Class 1 accessory, hereinafter referred to as "RB1") is "Black bar, red bar, Blue 7", Regular Bonus Role 2 (Type 1 accessory, hereinafter referred to as "RB1"), ``Black bar, red bar, red bar'' is the symbol that activates ``RB2'' (referred to as ``RB2''), ``white 7'', ``black bar'', and ``upper chili'' are symbols that constitute various small winnings and various replay winnings, etc. Patterns such as ``low chili'', ``bell'', ``cherry'', ``watermelon'', and ``replay'' are arranged.

FIG. 107 is a payout table and game state transition diagram. FIG. 107(A) is a payout table when the accessory is not activated and when playing the BB general game (specified number of 3 coins), but the same prescribed number is also used when the accessory is activated.

When all three drums have stopped, the main control unit 100 determines whether to display a combination of symbols related to winning or activation on the active line (see FIG. 51) according to the number of game medals inserted. In this case, the number of sheets inserted is three, and the valid line is only one line horizontally in the center.

(1) Big bonus role (RBB: Role continuous operation device related to the first class special role): Blue 7 on the left drum 2a, Blue 7 on the middle drum 2b, Blue 7 on the right drum 2c stopped on the effective line The winning number is 0, and a big bonus game (RBB game) is given after that. There is only one type of bonus combination symbol, and even if it is internally won individually, if the stop operation timing of the stop button part 10 is not correct, the predetermined bonus symbol will not stop on the active line, so it will not be able to be used in the next game or later. It will be carried over to.

This RBB game is designed to end when the number of coins paid out (number of coins acquired) exceeds 50, the number of coins inserted is three, and the probability of winning a small winning combination is the same as the normal game. In addition, since the number of inserted medals is 3 and the expected number of medals paid out per game is less than 3 (for example, about 2), when the RBB game ends, the number of medals will almost certainly decrease (in other words, The expected value of the increase in medals in one RBB game is negative). In other words, the RBB game is in a gaming state that is disadvantageous for the player. Incidentally, since the BB that decreases is fully explained in FIGS. 53 to 58, the contents of the explanation will be used here. However, the big bonus game is played by the big bonus general game and the regular bonus internal medium game in which the regular bonus role is internally won in the big bonus general game, and in both areas, the number of balls paid increases and the symbols are aligned. Basically, the regular bonus gaming state that has been transferred to is not set (penalty state).

In the normal gaming state (RT0 state: replay winning probability is approximately 1/7.3 of the predetermined value), if the bonus combination (RBB) is internally won (conditional device activated) and carried over, replay will not be possible at least from the next game onwards. The winning probability fluctuates and becomes a high probability replay state (RT1 state: replay probability approximately 1/5.5). When this bonus winning symbol is displayed (win) and the RBB game due to the activation of the bonus winning combination ends (end of operation), the replay winning probability changes and returns to the initial state (RT0 state). In other words, the player plays the variable display game in any of the gaming states: RT0 state, RT1 state, and RBB game state. Note that even if RBB is internally elected, the RT0 state may be maintained.

(2) 1st regular bonus role (unfavorable shift RB1: 1st class special role): Role name when watermelon is on the left drum 2a, cherry is on the middle drum 2b, and red bar is stopped on the active line on the right drum 2c , the number of acquired coins is 0, and a regular bonus game (RB game) is then provided. There is only one type of bonus combination symbol, and even if it is internally won individually, if the stop operation timing of the stop button part 10 is not correct, the above-mentioned predetermined bonus symbol will not stop on the active line, so it will not be possible to play in the next game. This will be carried forward thereafter. This RB1 game is designed to end after winning in 8 games or playing 12 games, but the number of coins inserted is 3, and the expected value of the number of coins paid out per game is less than 3 (for example, 1 Therefore, when the RB1 game ends, the number of medals will almost certainly decrease based on the calculation (in other words, the expected value of the increase in medals from one RB1 game will be negative). In other words, the RB1 game is in a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. One of the conditions for finishing the RB1 game is to play 12 games, and if you play 12 games, you will reduce the number of cards by 24 (-2 cards x 12 games). Incidentally, since the BB that decreases is fully explained in FIGS. 53 to 58, the contents thereof will be referred to. Further, by drawing a lottery for shift RB during unfavorable shift RB1 and carrying over the winning RB, it is possible to create a state in which shift RB is internally won after shift RB1 ends. For example, during Shift RB1, only Shift RB1 can be won, and if the winning ratio is set to about 10:1 for Shift RB1 to Shift RB2 (described later), players can take on the challenge and win Shift RB2. As you aim, it becomes much more interesting.

(3) 2nd regular bonus role (advantageous shift RB2: 1st class special role): Role name when watermelon on left drum 2a, red bar on middle drum 2b, and cherry on right drum 2c stop on the active line , the number of acquired coins is 0, and a regular bonus game (RB game) is then provided. There is only one type of bonus combination symbol, and even if it is internally won individually, if the stop operation timing of the stop button part 10 is not correct, the above-mentioned predetermined bonus symbol will not stop on the active line, so it will not be possible to play in the next game. This will be carried forward thereafter. This RB2 game is designed to end after winning in 8 games or playing 12 games, but the number of coins inserted is 3, and the expected value of the number of coins paid out per game is less than 3 (for example, 1 Therefore, when the RB2 game ends, the number of medals will almost certainly decrease (in other words, the expected value of the increase in medals from one RB1 game will be negative). In other words, the RB2 game is in a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. One of the conditions for finishing the RB2 game is to play 12 games, and if you play 12 games, you will reduce the number of cards by 24 (-2 cards x 12 games). Incidentally, since the BB that decreases is fully explained in FIGS. 53 to 58, the contents thereof will be referred to. Further, by drawing a lottery for shift RB during advantageous shift RB2 and carrying over the winning RB, it is possible to create a state in which shift RB is internally won after shift RB2 ends. For example, during Shift RB2, only Shift RB2 can be won, and if the winning ratio is about 1:1 between Shift RB1 and Shift RB2 (described later), it will be a penalty for the player, and he will not activate it desperately. This makes it more interesting.

(4) 1st small role (FR1: 1st target small role): This is the name of the role when the bell symbol on the left drum 2a, the bell symbol on the middle drum 2b, and the bell symbol on the right drum 2c are aligned on the effective line and stopped. Yes, the number of coins obtained (number of coins paid out) is 9. When the first minor prize is internally won in the winning lottery, the condition device of FR1 (Fruit 1) is set and activated. The symbols are arranged so that the bell symbol stops on the active line and always wins the prize (the bell symbol is displayed in a straight line horizontally in the center). In the RT0 state or the RT1 state, the first small winning combination is almost always won at the same time as the one-card small winning combination (inhibiting small winning combination) for controlling the push order. Note that the first target small winning combination is a small winning combination that should be won, and if the pressing order is correct, the winning is won, so it is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the pressing order is incorrect, the inhibiting small combination will either win or lose. When the assist function is activated, the order of operation of the stop button unit 10 to win the first target small winning combination is notified. Note that this is one of the ordinary small roles.

(5) 2nd small role (FR2: 2nd target small role): When the 2nd small role is won, the bell pattern will appear on the upper row of the left drum 2a, the bell symbol on the middle row of the middle drum 2b, and the bell symbol on the lower row of the right drum 2c. The game stops and is displayed, and the number of acquired coins (number of paid coins) becomes nine. However, on the effective line, for example, a replay is stopped on the left drum 2a, a bell is stopped on the middle drum 2b, and a square (blue) is stopped on the right drum 2c. When the second minor prize is internally won in the prize lottery, the FR2 (Fruit 2) conditional device is activated. Assuming that FR2 is won internally, the symbols are arranged so that the above-mentioned predetermined symbol stops on the active line and always wins, regardless of the order and timing of the stop button section 10 stop operation ( (The bell pattern is displayed in a straight line downward to the right). As will be described later, the second small winning combination is almost always won at the same time as the one-card small winning combination (inhibiting small winning combination) for press order control in the RT0 state or the RT1 state. Similarly, the second target small winning combination is a small winning combination that should be won, and if the pressing order is correct, the winning is won, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the pressing order is incorrect, the inhibiting small combination will either win or lose. When the assist function is activated, the order in which the stop button section 10 is operated in order to win the second target small winning combination is notified. Note that this is one of the ordinary small roles.

(6) 3rd small role (FR3: 3rd target small role): When the 3rd small role is won, the bell pattern will appear on the lower row of the left drum 2a, the bell symbol on the middle row of the middle drum 2b, and the bell symbol on the upper row of the right drum 2c. The game stops and is displayed, and the number of acquired coins (number of paid coins) becomes nine. However, on the effective line, for example, a pentagon (white) is placed on the left drum 2a, a bell is placed on the middle drum 2b, and the replay is stopped on the right drum 2c. When the third minor prize is internally won in the prize lottery, the FR3 (Fruit 3) conditional device is activated. Assuming that FR3 is won internally, the symbols are arranged so that the above-mentioned predetermined symbol will stop on the activated line and will definitely win, regardless of the order and timing of the stop button section 10. The bell symbol is displayed in a straight line upwards to the right). As will be described later, the third small winning combination is almost always won at the same time as the one-card small winning combination (inhibiting small winning combination) for press order control in the RT0 state or the RT1 state. Similarly, the third target small winning combination is a small winning combination that should be won, and it is advantageous for the player because it will win if the pressing order is correct. On the other hand, if the pressing order is incorrect, the inhibiting small combination will either win or lose. When the assist function is activated, the order in which the stop button section 10 is operated in order to win the first target small winning combination is notified. Note that this is one of the ordinary small roles.

(7) Common Bell Minor Win (FR4): When a Common Bell Minor Win is won, the bell symbol will be displayed on the upper row of the left drum 2a, the bell symbol on the upper row of the middle drum 2b, and the bell symbol on the upper row of the right drum 2c in a uniform state. , the number of coins obtained (number of coins paid out) is nine. However, other predetermined symbols stop on the active line. When the second minor prize is internally won in the prize lottery, the condition device of FR4 (Fruit 2) is activated. In FR4, the symbols are arranged so that the above-mentioned predetermined symbol stops on the active line and always wins regardless of the order and timing of the stop button section 10 (visually, the bell symbol is in a straight line at the top). ). Note that this is one of the ordinary small roles.

(8) 1-card small role (hindering small role for press order control: FR5 to FRn): This is a small role (bonus inhibiting small role) to prevent the above-mentioned bonus role from being drawn, and if you win, the number of pieces obtained ( The number of coins to be paid out is one. In addition, if any of the first to third target small roles are won at the same time and the pressing order is incorrect, this is a small role (bonus inhibiting small role) for not drawing in each target small role. Note that n is an arbitrary integer and is determined as necessary in the design, and as a result, the type of one-card small winning combination is n+3. A single or multiple 1-card small winning combination constitutes a common 1-card small winning combination (1-card common winning combination). When a rare small winning combination (cherry, watermelon, chance) and a common one piece small winning combination are won at the same time, the main control unit 100 changes the small winning symbols to be drawn between RB1 inside and RB2 inside. That is, the main control unit 100 stops any symbol of the common one-piece small winning combination in RB1 and does not allow a rare small winning combination to win, but conversely stops the rare small winning symbol in RB2. Then, stop control is performed so that any of the common one-card small winning combinations will not be won. This makes the difference in advantage. Note that this is one of the ordinary small roles.

(9) Middle cherry role (FRn+1): This is the name of the role when the cherry symbol on the left drum 2a and the bell or replay symbol on the middle drum 2b and right drum 2c are aligned and stopped on the active line, and the number of pieces obtained is 1. becomes (written as cherry/ANY/ANY). When the middle cherry combination is internally won in the lottery, one condition device of FRn+1 (fruit n+1) (and a plurality of common one-card combinations) is activated. If you aim for the black bar on the left reel, the cherry symbol will stop and the AT bonus (assist bonus) will be confirmed. When you aim at the big spot symbols (the top spot symbol and the bottom spot symbol) on the left reel, the big spot symbols stop at the bottom, giving it a powerful feel and can give excitement to the player. Further, the big bonus role, the middle cherry role, and the common one-card role may be won at the same time, and in this case, the AT bonus and the big bonus are confirmed. Furthermore, this is one of the rare small roles.

(8) Strong Cherry Role (FRn+2): This is the name of the role when there are three cherry symbols on the lower row of the left drum 2a, and three cherry symbols on the middle drum 2b and right drum 2c, arranged upward to the right and stopped, and the number of pieces obtained is 1. becomes. In addition, the big bonus role, the strong cherry role, and the common 1-card role may be won at the same time, and the AT bonus is drawn with high probability. Furthermore, this is one of the rare small roles.

(9) Middle Cherry (FRn+3): Cherry symbol on the lower row of the left drum 2a, cherry symbol on the middle drum 2b, and other symbols than the cherry symbol on the right drum 2c stop, and two cherry symbols are displayed on the upper right corner to obtain. The number of sheets is 1. Further, the big bonus role, the medium cherry role, and the common 1-card role may be won at the same time, and the AT bonus is drawn with medium probability. Furthermore, this is one of the rare small roles.

(10) Weak cherry combination (FRn+4): Cherry symbols are stopped on the lower row of the left drum 2a, and symbols other than cherry symbols are stopped on the middle drum 2b and right drum 2c, and the number of winning pieces is 1. Further, the big bonus role, the weak cherry role, and the common 1-card role may be won at the same time, and the AT bonus is drawn with a low probability. In each cherry role, the common small role and the common 1-card role are won at the same time, and in that case, the cherry small role is determined when RBB, RB1 or RB2 is internally won and when it is not internally won. The stop control that determines whether or not to draw in the symbols that make up the winning combination changes. Furthermore, this is one of the rare small roles.

(11) Watermelon win (FRn+5): This is the name of the role when there is a watermelon symbol on the upper row of the left drum 2a, and three watermelon symbols on the middle drum 2b and right drum 2c are aligned downward to the right and stop, and the number of winning pieces is 1. Become. Further, the big bonus role, the watermelon role, and the common 1-card role may be won at the same time, and the AT bonus is drawn with high probability. Furthermore, this is one of the rare small roles.

(12) Chance role (FRn+6): This is the name of the role when the watermelon symbol is on the upper row of the left drum 2a, and the watermelon symbol is on the middle drum 2b and right drum 2c, and the watermelon symbol stops downward to the right in a missed position, and the number of winning pieces is 1. becomes. Further, the big bonus role, the chance role, and the common one-card role may be won at the same time, and the AT bonus is drawn with high probability or low probability. For the watermelon role and the chance role, the common small role and the common 1-card role are won at the same time, and in that case, when RBB, RB1 or RB2 is internally won, and when it is not internally won, The stop control that determines whether or not to draw in the symbols that make up both winning combinations changes. Furthermore, this is one of the rare small roles.

(13) Replay (re-game): This is the role name when the replay symbols are aligned on the active line on three drums, and no medals are acquired for this. When an internal win is won, an RP flag is set in the flag area, and even when this is won alone or when it is won at the same time as a bonus combination, the replay is always won and activated. In the replay, there is only one type of combination of symbols, and by operating the start lever 9 by the player, the next game can be played without inserting medals. Note that even if replay is activated, it does not trigger a change in RT (replay winning probability).

In FIG. 107(B), a general game (described as "general game" in the figure) starts from the next game after the big bonus game (RBB game) ends. The replay probability (probability of winning a replay) in this general game is approximately 1/7.3 (set number 8978/65536) (initial replay state: normal game in a state where the replay probability does not change).

In a general game (regular game), when RBB, which is a big bonus combination, is internally won and RBB wins in that game, the RBB game starts from the next game. The RBB game ends when the payout of medals exceeds a predetermined number of 50 medals, and the next game enters a normal replay state in which the probability of winning a replay combination is low. It should be noted that the general game → RBB is internally won → RBB won → more than 50 coins paid out in the RBB game → RBB game ends → the regular game is repeated. In other words, the pachislot game includes a normal game in which at least a replay winning combination is won with a predetermined probability, and a big bonus game in which a big bonus winning combination (RBB) is won and activated in the normal game. There is also an RBB internal medium game that does not operate and becomes an internal winning state.

The big bonus game includes a big bonus general game, a regular bonus game in which a regular bonus role (RB1 or RB2) is won in this big bonus general game, a symbol is displayed, and the game moves when activated, and any winning game. There is a regular bonus internal game (inside RB1 or inside RB2) in which the regular bonus combination is not activated and becomes an internal winning state. The regular bonus winnings include at least two types of normal regular bonus winnings (RB1) and a more advantageous regular bonus winning (RB2), and one of them wins with a high probability in the big bonus general game.

During the big bonus game (during the RBB game), if the first regular bonus combination (normal regular bonus combination) becomes an internal winning state, the next game will be the first regular bonus internal medium game. On the other hand, if the second regular bonus combination (advantageous regular bonus combination) becomes an internal winning state during the big bonus game, the game becomes a second regular bonus internal medium game. The main control unit 100 controls, in either the normal game or the first regular bonus internal medium game, or in both games, a compound small winning combination (for example, a plurality of common one-card small winnings, first to third bell small winnings, If the common bell minor prize and the rare minor prize are won at the same time, the one-piece minor prize or the rare minor prize is drawn in and won, but the rare minor prize is kicked away and is not won. On the other hand, the main control unit 100 controls, in the advantageous regular bonus internal medium game, a combination of multiple small winnings (for example, multiple common one-card small winnings, first to third bell small winnings, common bell small winnings, and rare small winnings). ) is won, the rare minor prize is drawn in and awarded, but the one-card minor prize or the bell minor prize is kicked away and is not awarded. Note that even if you perform pull-in control, you may miss out on the cherry, watermelon, chance, and one-card small roles.

In the case where a composite small winning combination is won, the main control unit 100 (advantageous processing means) awards an AT bonus (assist game or notification game) in the second regular bonus internal medium game more than in the first regular bonus internal medium game. Perform processing that is advantageous to the user. For example, in the first regular bonus internal medium game, the main control unit 100 (advantageous processing means) may win the 1 piece small win or the bell small win even if any composite small win is won, and the AT bonus will not be awarded. There will be no winning or losing lottery or additional lottery, but on the other hand, if any composite minor prize is won in the second regular bonus internal medium game, a rare minor prize will be won and the AT bonus lottery, additional lottery, or stock lottery will be held. etc. (perform processing advantageous for assist games). Further, the main control unit 100 (advantageous processing means) performs processing that is more advantageous for the assist game in the second regular bonus internal medium game than in the normal game. Further, the main control unit 100 (advantageous processing means) performs processing with different advantages, such as normal game < first regular bonus internal medium game < second regular bonus internal medium game. Specifically, when a composite minor prize is won, the main control unit 100 performs a process of kicking away the rare minor prize in the normal game, and a process of kicking away the rare minor prize among some of the composite minor prizes in the first regular bonus internal medium game. In the draw-in process and the second regular bonus internal medium game, it is also possible to execute the process to draw in the rare small winning combinations among all the composite small winning combinations, and after controlling the attraction of the rare small winning combinations, to perform processing advantageous for the assist game.

FIGS. 108 to 111 are schematic diagrams chronologically showing the pattern display state of the window. Using these figures, the stop control when a composite small winning combination is won will be explained in detail.

First, in a normal game in which a replay winning combination is won with a predetermined probability (1/7.3), when a big bonus winning combination is won and an activation symbol is displayed (for example, blue 7, blue 7, blue 7), Move to big bonus games. Big bonus games include big bonus general games, in which small winning combinations have the same probability as normal games. In the big bonus general game, there are a regular bonus game in which a regular bonus combination is won and is activated, and a transition is made, and a regular bonus internal medium game in which the won regular bonus combination is not activated and becomes an internal winning state. There are at least two types of regular bonus roles, including a first regular bonus role and a second regular bonus role that is more advantageous than the first regular bonus role. In the first regular bonus internal medium game, by operating a stop switch, a plurality of spinning drums are stopped and controlled so that a normal small winning combination is drawn in and a normal small winning combination is won. On the other hand, in the second regular bonus internal medium game, by operating the stop switch, a plurality of spinning drums are stopped and controlled so that a rare small winning symbol is drawn in and a rare small winning combination is won. In other words, the main control unit 100 (advantageous processing means) performs processing that is more advantageous for the AT bonus (assist game) in the second regular bonus internal medium game than in the first regular bonus internal medium game (advantageous processing for the high probability game). (transfer lottery, AT lottery, additional lottery, stock lottery, etc.). Note that if you perform any operation other than the left 1st operation during the normal game, you will be penalized, and the assist lottery will not be performed for several games. Similarly, any operation other than left 1st while inside the RB will result in a penalty.

Referring to FIG. 108, in the RB1 internal medium game (first regular bonus internal winning game), when composite small winning combination 1 is internally won, a common bell small winning combination (FR4), multiple one-card small winning combinations (FR5 to FRn) A plurality of any of them) and a middle cherry combination become a winning state at the same time. FIG. 108(A) shows a state in which three reels are rotating.

When the player aims at the black bar of the DDT point on the left reel and operates the left stop button 10a at the first stop, the bell symbol (the replay symbol on the active line) stops at the upper row (Fig. 108 (B1) reference). At this time, the cherry pattern is stopped outside the frame by kicking control. When the middle stop button 10b is operated at the second stop, the bell symbol (the replay symbol on the active line) stops in the upper row (see FIG. 108 (C1)). When the right stop button 10c is operated at the third stop, the bell symbol (watermelon symbol on the active line) stops in the upper row, the bell symbol is displayed in a straight line in the upper row, and the upper bell wins the prize (Fig. 108 ( (See D1). The payout is 9 pieces.

On the other hand, in the RB2 internal medium game (second regular bonus internal medium game), when the compound small winning combination 1 is internally won, when the player aims at the black bar of DDT points and operates the left stop button 10a at the first stop. , the cherry symbol stops at the middle stage on the active line (see FIG. 108 (B2)). In addition, when you aim for the white 7 symbol, the upper thin symbol stops in the middle row and the lower thin symbol stops in the lower row, making it very impressive. The main control unit 100 controls to draw in the cherry symbol or the top thin symbol in the middle row, which has a large number of combination symbols, although the payout for the upper row bell is 9, which is a large number.

When the middle stop button 10b is operated at the second stop, the replay symbol stops at the middle stage (see FIG. 108 (C2)). When the right stop button 10c is operated at the third stop, the bell symbol stops at the upper row and the middle row cherry wins (see FIG. 108 (D2)). The payout is one piece.

The main control unit 100 (advantageous processing means) controls that even if the same composite small winning combination 1 is won internally, the second regular bonus internal medium game is better than the first regular bonus internal medium game as an assist game (AT bonus, etc.). ) (perform AT bonus lottery, additional lottery, stock lottery, etc.). In addition, in the general game (regular game), if RBB, which is a big bonus combination, is won internally, and RBB does not win in that game, the game shifts to the RBB internal medium game. Even in this RBB internal medium game, the main control unit 100 can perform advantageous processing by performing draw-in control so as to win a middle-tier cherry when the composite small winning combination 1 is internally won. In the RBB internal medium game, advantageous processing is not performed in the game after, for example, a pure loss is won and the RBB symbol can be drawn in. This allows you to prevent the player from performing the intended strategy. On the other hand, in the RBB internal medium game in the general game (normal game), disadvantageous control may be performed as in the first regular bonus internal medium game without changing the stop control. .

Referring to FIG. 109, in the RB1 internal medium game (first regular bonus internal winning game), when composite small winning combination 2 is internally won, a plurality of one-card small winning combinations (a plurality of any of FR5 to FRn) and a strong cherry The roles become elected at the same time. FIG. 109(A) shows a state in which three reels are rotating.

When the player aims at the black bar of the DDT point on the left reel and operates the left stop button 10a at the first stop, the bell symbol (on the active line, the replay symbol of a single small role symbol) will stop. (See FIG. 109(B1)). At this time, the cherry pattern is stopped outside the frame by kicking control. When the middle stop button 10b is operated at the second stop, the watermelon symbol stops on the active line in the middle row, and the 1-card small winning combination becomes tenpai (see FIG. 109 (C1)). When the right stop button 10c is operated at the third stop, the bell symbol stops on the active line in the middle row, and one small winning combination is won (see FIG. 109 (D1)). The payout is one piece. Note that this one-piece small winning combination may be missed if the symbols are not within the retractable range, and in that case, the winning is not made and there is no payout.

On the other hand, in the RB2 internal medium game (second regular bonus internal medium game), when the compound small winning combination 2 is internally won, when the player aims at the black bar of DDT points and operates the left stop button 10a at the first stop. , the black bar symbol stops in the middle of the active line (see FIG. 109 (B2)).

When the middle stop button 10b is operated at the second stop, the cherry symbol stops at the middle stage (see FIG. 109 (C2)). When the right stop button 10c is operated at the third stop, the cherry symbol stops on the upper row and a strong cherry wins (see FIG. 109 (D2)). Three cherry symbols are displayed upward to the right, and the payout is one.

The main control unit 100 (advantageous processing means) is configured such that even if the same composite small winning combination 2 is won internally, the second regular bonus internal medium game is better than the first regular bonus internal medium game as an assist game (AT bonus, etc.). ) (perform AT bonus lottery, additional lottery, stock lottery, etc.). In addition, in the general game (regular game), if RBB, which is a big bonus combination, is won internally, and RBB does not win in that game, the game shifts to the RBB internal medium game. Even in this RBB internal medium game, the main control unit 100 can perform advantageous processing by performing attraction control so as to win a strong cherry when the composite small winning combination 2 is internally won. In the RBB internal medium game, advantageous processing is not performed in the game after, for example, a pure loss is won and the RBB symbol can be drawn in. This allows you to prevent the player from performing the intended strategy. On the other hand, in the RBB internal medium game in the general game (normal game), disadvantageous control may be performed as in the first regular bonus internal medium game without changing the stop control. .

When the composite small winning combination 3 is internally won, a plurality of one-card small winning combinations (a plurality of any one of FR5 to FRn) and a medium cherry winning combination become a winning state at the same time. Further, when the composite small winning combination 4 is internally won, a plurality of one-card small winning combinations (a plurality of any one of FR5 to FRn) and a weak cherry winning state become a winning state at the same time. FIG. 109(A) shows a state in which three reels are rotating. In the RB1 internal medium game, if Composite Minor Win 3 or Compound Minor Win 4 is won, Figure 109 (B1), Figure 109 (C1), and Figure 109 (D1) are the same as when Compound Minor Win 2 is internally won. Use explanation.

In addition, in the RB2 internal medium game, when the composite minor winning combination 3 or the composite minor winning combination 4 is won, the explanation up to FIG. 109 (B2) is the same, so the explanation will be used. When the compound small winning combination 3 is internally won, when the middle stop button 10b is operated at the second stop, the cherry symbol stops at the middle row (see FIG. 109 (C2)). When the right stop button 10c is operated at the third stop, the cherry symbol does not stop in the upper row, but a middle cherry wins (not shown). On the other hand, when the compound small winning combination 4 is internally won, when the middle stop button 10b is operated at the second stop, the cherry symbol does not stop in the middle row, and when the right stop button 10c is operated at the third stop, the cherry symbol is It does not stop within the frame and the weak cherry winning combination wins (not shown). The payout for both is 1 piece.

The main control unit 100 (advantageous processing means) provides more assistance in the second regular bonus internal medium game than in the first regular bonus internal medium game even if the same composite small winning combination 3 or composite small winning combination 4 is internally won. Processing that is advantageous for games (AT bonus, etc.) is performed (AT bonus lottery, additional lottery, stock lottery, etc.). In the general game (regular game), RBB, which is a big bonus combination, is internally won, and if RBB does not win in that game, the game shifts to the RBB internal medium game. Even in this RBB internal medium game, the main control unit 100 can perform advantageous processing by performing draw-in control so as to win a middle-tier cherry when the composite small winning combination 1 is internally won. In the RBB internal medium game, advantageous processing is not performed in the game after, for example, a pure loss is won and the RBB symbol can be drawn in. This allows you to prevent the player from performing the intended strategy. On the other hand, in the RBB internal medium game in the general game (normal game), disadvantageous control may be performed as in the first regular bonus internal medium game without changing the stop control. .

Referring to FIG. 110, in the RB1 internal medium game (first regular bonus internal winning game), when composite small winning combination 5 is internally won, the second small winning combination (FR4), multiple one-piece small winning combinations (FR5 to FRn) (a plurality of any of them) and the watermelon combination become a winning state at the same time. FIG. 110(A) shows a state in which three reels are rotating.

When the player aims at the black bar of the DDT point on the left reel and operates the left stop button 10a at the first stop, the bell symbol (the replay symbol on the active line) stops at the upper row (Fig. 110 (B1) reference). At this time, the cherry pattern is stopped outside the frame by kicking control. Also, the watermelon pattern is not pulled into the upper row. When the middle stop button 10b is operated at the second stop, the bell symbol stops on the middle effective line (see FIG. 110 (C1)). When you operate the right stop button 10c at the third stop, the bell symbol (replay symbol on the active line) stops at the lower row, the bell symbol is displayed in a straight line downward to the right, and the bell symbol at the lower right (second minor role) stops. ) wins a prize (see FIG. 110 (D1)). The payout is 9 pieces.

On the other hand, in the RB2 internal medium game (second regular bonus internal medium game), when the compound small winning combination 5 is internally won, when the player aims at the black bar of DDT points and operates the left stop button 10a at the first stop. , the black bar is kicked out of the frame, the bell symbol stops in the middle row on the active line, and the watermelon symbol is displayed in the upper row (see FIG. 110 (B2)).

When the middle stop button 10b is operated at the second stop, the watermelon symbol stops at the middle stage (see FIG. 110 (C2)). When the right stop button 10c is operated at the third stop, the watermelon symbol stops at the lower row and the watermelon winning combination is won (see FIG. 110 (D2)). Three watermelon symbols are displayed downward to the right, and the payout is one.

The main control unit 100 (advantageous processing means) controls that even if the same composite small winning combination 5 is won internally, the second regular bonus internal medium game is better than the first regular bonus internal medium game as an assist game (AT bonus, etc.). ) (perform AT bonus lottery, additional lottery, stock lottery, etc.). In addition, in the general game (regular game), if RBB, which is a big bonus combination, is won internally, and RBB does not win in that game, the game shifts to the RBB internal medium game. Even in this RBB internal medium game, the main control unit 100 can perform advantageous processing by performing draw-in control so as to win a middle-tier cherry when the composite small winning combination 1 is internally won. In the RBB internal medium game, advantageous processing is not performed in the game after, for example, a pure loss is won and the RBB symbol can be drawn in. This allows you to prevent the player from performing the intended strategy. On the other hand, in the RBB internal medium game in the general game (normal game), disadvantageous control may be performed as in the first regular bonus internal medium game without changing the stop control. .

Referring to FIG. 111, in the RB1 internal medium game (first regular bonus internal winning game), when composite small winning combination 6 is internally won, the second small winning combination (FR4), multiple one-piece small winning combinations (FR5 to FRn) (more than one of them) and the chance eyes become a winning state at the same time. FIG. 111(A) shows a state in which three reels are rotating. In the RB1 internal medium game, when the composite small prize 6 is won, Figures 110 (B1) to 110 (D1) and Figures 110 (B2) to 110 (C2) are when the composite minor prize 5 is won internally Since they are the same, I will use the explanation.

In the state of FIG. 111 (C2), when the right stop button 10c is operated at the third stop, the watermelon symbol will stop on the active line, and the white 7 symbol (or blue 7 symbol or red bar symbol) will be displayed at the bottom. If you have a chance, you will win a prize. The payout is one piece.

The main control unit 100 (advantageous processing means) controls that even if the same composite small winning combination 6 is won internally, the second regular bonus internal medium game is better than the first regular bonus internal medium game as an assist game (AT bonus, etc.). ) (perform AT bonus lottery, additional lottery, stock lottery, etc.). In addition, in the general game (regular game), if RBB, which is a big bonus combination, is won internally, and RBB does not win in that game, the game shifts to the RBB internal medium game. Even in this RBB internal medium game, the main control unit 100 can perform advantageous processing by performing draw-in control so as to win a middle-tier cherry when the composite small winning combination 1 is internally won. In the RBB internal medium game, advantageous processing is not performed in the game after, for example, a pure loss is won and the RBB symbol can be drawn in. This allows you to prevent the player from performing the intended strategy. On the other hand, in the RBB internal medium game in the general game (normal game), disadvantageous control may be performed as in the first regular bonus internal medium game without changing the stop control.

1 Reel-type gaming machine main body 1a Housing 1b Front door 2 Drum section 2a Left drum 2b Middle drum 2c Right drum 3 Window section 4 Display LED block 4a Input number of coins LED
4b LED indicating the number of stored medals
4c LED indicating the number of medals paid out
4d Replay display LED4d
4e Error display LED
4f Display LED during production
5 Medal insertion section 5a Left light transmission section 5b Right light transmission section 6 Settlement button (credit return switch)
7 1 bet button 8 Max bet button 9 Start lever 10 Stop button section 10a Left stop button 10b Middle stop button 10c Right stop button 11 Display production device 12 Speaker section 12a Upper left speaker 12b Upper right speaker 12c Lower left speaker 12d Lower right speaker 13 Game state Display LED section 14 Special button 15 Receiving tray 16 Medal payout port 17 Logo panel section 18 Medal payout device 19 Door keyhole 20 Return button 21 Transparent panel 22 Design panel 23 Decoration 24 Electrically driven object 25 Input SW section 26 Timing section 27 Reflector plate 28 Power supply section 28a Setting key switch 28b Error release switch 28c Power switch 28d Keyhole 50 Card balance display section 51 Lend button 52 Return button 100 Main control section 101 ROM
102 RAM
110 Start SW sensor 111 Operation direction sensor 112 Special button sensor 113 Door abnormality signal output device 120 Stop button sensor 130 Medal detection sensor 140 Bet button sensor 150 Stage setting section 160 Sub-control section 161 ROM
162 RAM
165 Credit control section 166 Data input circuit 300 Sanding device 310 Bill insertion section 320 Data display section 321 Cash count display section 322 Credit count display section 330 Operation section 331 10 key 332 Return button 333 Switch button 334 Payout button 340 Card insertion section

Claims (1)

Multiple drums with multiple types of designs arranged on the outer circumferential surface,
In a game, a winning combination means for drawing a winning combination using lottery data;
In a game, a plurality of drums are rotated, and by accepting the operation of a stop switch provided corresponding to each drum, the corresponding drums are stopped individually, and a symbol is displayed according to the lottery result of the winning combination. control means for;
In the game, advantageous processing means that performs advantageous processing;
Equipped with
Among the roles determined by the lottery by the role lottery means, there are at least a big bonus role, a regular bonus role, a small role, and a replay role,
The games include at least a normal game in which the replay winning combination is won with a predetermined probability, a big bonus game in which the big bonus winning combination is won in the normal game and is activated, and a procedure for operating the stop switch. There is an assist game where the
The small prizes include a rare minor prize, an ordinary minor prize, and a composite minor prize in which the rare minor prize and the ordinary minor prize are won at the same time,
The big bonus game includes a big bonus general game, a regular bonus game in which a regular bonus role is won in the big bonus general game and is transferred when activated, and a regular bonus game in which the won regular bonus role is not activated and is transferred to an internal winning game. There is a regular bonus internal game that has become a state,
The regular bonus roles include a first regular bonus role and a second regular bonus role that is more advantageous than the first regular bonus role,
The regular bonus internal medium game includes a first regular bonus internal medium game in which the first regular bonus role has become an internal winning state, and a second regular bonus internal medium game in which the second regular bonus role has become an internal winning state. There is a game,
In the first regular bonus internal medium game,
When the composite small winning combination is won, the control means controls the plurality of spinning drums to stop so as to draw the normal small winning symbols onto the active line by operating the stop switch;
In the second regular bonus internal medium game,
The control means controls to stop the plurality of rotating drums so as to draw a rare small winning symbol onto the active line by operating the stop switch when the composite small winning combination is won;
When the composite small winning combination is won, the advantageous processing means performs processing that is more advantageous for the assist game in the second regular bonus internal medium game than in the first regular bonus internal medium game;
A gaming machine featuring:

Images